Fix ARI text for floatformat_from_double
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texi
CommitLineData
252b5132
RH
1\input texinfo
2@setfilename ld.info
82704155 3@c Copyright (C) 1991-2019 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 4@syncodeindex ky cp
dff70155 5@c man begin INCLUDE
252b5132
RH
6@include configdoc.texi
7@c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
c428fa83 8@include bfdver.texi
dff70155 9@c man end
252b5132
RH
10
11@c @smallbook
12
ff5dcc92
SC
13@macro gcctabopt{body}
14@code{\body\}
15@end macro
16
0285c67d
NC
17@c man begin NAME
18@ifset man
19@c Configure for the generation of man pages
20@set UsesEnvVars
21@set GENERIC
0285c67d 22@set ARM
ac145307 23@set C6X
b8891f8d 24@set CSKY
49fa1e15 25@set H8300
0285c67d 26@set HPPA
0285c67d 27@set M68HC11
7fb9f789 28@set M68K
833794fc 29@set MIPS
3c3bdf30 30@set MMIX
2469cfa2 31@set MSP430
35c08157 32@set NDS32
78058a5e 33@set NIOSII
2a60a7a8
AM
34@set POWERPC
35@set POWERPC64
49fa1e15 36@set Renesas
b4cbbe8f 37@set S/390
49fa1e15
AM
38@set SPU
39@set TICOFF
2ca22b03 40@set WIN32
e0001a05 41@set XTENSA
0285c67d
NC
42@end ifset
43@c man end
44
9160ea82
AM
45@ifnottex
46@dircategory Software development
47@direntry
252b5132 48* Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
9160ea82
AM
49@end direntry
50@end ifnottex
252b5132 51
0e9517a9 52@copying
e49e529d
JM
53This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
54@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
55@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
56@end ifset
57version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 58
82704155 59Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2019 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 60
cf055d54 61Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 62under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
cf055d54
NC
63or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
64with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
65Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 66section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0e9517a9 67@end copying
252b5132
RH
68@iftex
69@finalout
70@setchapternewpage odd
71ba23f6 71@settitle The GNU linker
252b5132 72@titlepage
71ba23f6 73@title The GNU linker
252b5132 74@sp 1
e49e529d
JM
75@subtitle @code{ld}
76@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
77@subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
78@end ifset
252b5132
RH
79@subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
80@author Steve Chamberlain
81@author Ian Lance Taylor
252b5132
RH
82@page
83
84@tex
85{\parskip=0pt
704c465c
NC
86\hfill Red Hat Inc\par
87\hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
71ba23f6 88\hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
252b5132
RH
89\hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
90}
91\global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
92@end tex
93
94@vskip 0pt plus 1filll
0285c67d 95@c man begin COPYRIGHT
82704155 96Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2019 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 97
0285c67d 98Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 99under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
0285c67d
NC
100or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
101with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
102Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 103section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0285c67d 104@c man end
252b5132 105
252b5132
RH
106@end titlepage
107@end iftex
4ecceb71 108@contents
252b5132
RH
109@c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
110
84ec0e6d 111@ifnottex
252b5132 112@node Top
71ba23f6 113@top LD
e49e529d
JM
114This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
115@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
116@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
117@end ifset
118version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 119
cf055d54 120This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
793c5807
NC
121Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
122in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
cf055d54 123
252b5132
RH
124@menu
125* Overview:: Overview
126* Invocation:: Invocation
127* Scripts:: Linker Scripts
128@ifset GENERIC
129* Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
130@end ifset
131@ifclear GENERIC
132@ifset H8300
133* H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
134@end ifset
c2dcd04e
NC
135@ifset Renesas
136* Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
252b5132 137@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
138@ifset ARM
139* ARM:: ld and the ARM family
140@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
141@ifset M68HC11
142* M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
143@end ifset
7ca01ed9
NC
144@ifset HPPA
145* HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
146@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
147@ifset M68K
148* M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
149@end ifset
833794fc
MR
150@ifset MIPS
151* MIPS:: ld and MIPS family
152@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
153@ifset POWERPC
154* PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
155@end ifset
156@ifset POWERPC64
157* PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
158@end ifset
b4cbbe8f
AK
159@ifset S/390
160* S/390 ELF:: ld and S/390 ELF Support
161@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
162@ifset SPU
163* SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
164@end ifset
74459f0e
TW
165@ifset TICOFF
166* TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
167@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
168@ifset WIN32
169* Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
170@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
171@ifset XTENSA
172* Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
173@end ifset
252b5132
RH
174@end ifclear
175@ifclear SingleFormat
176* BFD:: BFD
177@end ifclear
178@c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
179
180* Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
181* MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
704c465c 182* GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
370b66a1 183* LD Index:: LD Index
252b5132 184@end menu
84ec0e6d 185@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
186
187@node Overview
188@chapter Overview
189
190@cindex @sc{gnu} linker
191@cindex what is this?
0285c67d 192
0879a67a 193@ifset man
0285c67d 194@c man begin SYNOPSIS
ff5dcc92 195ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
0285c67d
NC
196@c man end
197
198@c man begin SEEALSO
199ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
200the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
201@file{ld}.
202@c man end
203@end ifset
204
205@c man begin DESCRIPTION
206
ff5dcc92 207@command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
252b5132 208their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
ff5dcc92 209compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
252b5132 210
ff5dcc92 211@command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
252b5132
RH
212a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
213to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
214
0285c67d
NC
215@ifset man
216@c For the man only
ece2d90e 217This man page does not describe the command language; see the
71ba23f6
NC
218@command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
219language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
0285c67d
NC
220@end ifset
221
252b5132 222@ifclear SingleFormat
ff5dcc92
SC
223This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
224to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
252b5132
RH
225write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
226@code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
227available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
228@end ifclear
229
230Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
231linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
232execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
ff5dcc92 233@command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
252b5132
RH
234(or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
235
0285c67d
NC
236@c man end
237
252b5132
RH
238@node Invocation
239@chapter Invocation
240
0285c67d
NC
241@c man begin DESCRIPTION
242
ff5dcc92 243The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
252b5132
RH
244and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
245you have many choices to control its behavior.
246
0285c67d
NC
247@c man end
248
252b5132
RH
249@ifset UsesEnvVars
250@menu
a05a5b64 251* Options:: Command-line Options
252b5132
RH
252* Environment:: Environment Variables
253@end menu
254
255@node Options
a05a5b64 256@section Command-line Options
252b5132
RH
257@end ifset
258
259@cindex command line
260@cindex options
0285c67d
NC
261
262@c man begin OPTIONS
263
252b5132
RH
264The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
265practice few of them are used in any particular context.
266@cindex standard Unix system
ff5dcc92 267For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
252b5132
RH
268object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
269link a file @code{hello.o}:
270
271@smallexample
272ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
273@end smallexample
274
ff5dcc92 275This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
252b5132
RH
276result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
277the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
278directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
279
ff5dcc92 280Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
511ab9e9
ILT
281point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
282as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
283which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
284files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
285different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
252b5132
RH
286occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
287option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
288noted in the descriptions below.
289
290@cindex object files
511ab9e9
ILT
291Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
292together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
293options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
294an option and its argument.
252b5132
RH
295
296Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
297specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
298and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
299are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
300message @samp{No input files}.
301
36f63dca 302If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
252b5132
RH
303assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
304augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
305linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
306permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
307or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
53d25da6
AM
308@code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
309script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
310extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
311to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
312the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
252b5132
RH
313
314For options whose names are a single letter,
315option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
316whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
317option that requires them.
318
319For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
e4897a32 320precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
36f63dca 321@samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
e4897a32 322this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
ba1be17e 323only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
e4897a32
NC
324@samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
325name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
326output.
327
328Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
329option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
330immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
331@samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
332Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
333accepted.
252b5132 334
36f63dca 335Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
a05a5b64 336(e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command-line options should be
fa19fce0
NC
337prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
338compiler driver) like this:
4e53152f
NC
339
340@smallexample
2509a395 341 gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
4e53152f
NC
342@end smallexample
343
344This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
2509a395
SL
345silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
346may also arise when passing options that require values through a
347driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
348a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
349and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
350the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
351
352@smallexample
353 gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
354@end smallexample
4e53152f 355
a05a5b64 356Here is a table of the generic command-line switches accepted by the GNU
4e53152f
NC
357linker:
358
ff5dcc92 359@table @gcctabopt
38fc1cb1 360@include at-file.texi
dff70155 361
2509a395
SL
362@kindex -a @var{keyword}
363@item -a @var{keyword}
252b5132
RH
364This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
365argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
366@samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
367@samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
368to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
369
7ee314fa
AM
370@kindex --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
371@item --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
372Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_AUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
373@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
374specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_AUDIT}
375will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. If the linker
376finds an object with an audit entry while searching for shared libraries,
9d5777a3 377it will add a corresponding @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry in the output file.
7ee314fa 378This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit
9d5777a3 379interface.
7ee314fa 380
252b5132
RH
381@ifclear SingleFormat
382@cindex binary input format
383@kindex -b @var{format}
384@kindex --format=@var{format}
385@cindex input format
386@cindex input format
387@item -b @var{input-format}
388@itemx --format=@var{input-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
389@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
390file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 391@samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
ff5dcc92 392that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
252b5132 393configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
ff5dcc92 394to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
252b5132
RH
395default input format the most usual format on each machine.
396@var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
397supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
398formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
399@xref{BFD}.
400
401You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
402binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
403linking object files of different formats), by including
404@samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
a1ab1d2a 405particular format.
252b5132
RH
406
407The default format is taken from the environment variable
408@code{GNUTARGET}.
409@ifset UsesEnvVars
410@xref{Environment}.
411@end ifset
412You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
0285c67d
NC
413@code{TARGET};
414@ifclear man
415see @ref{Format Commands}.
416@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
417@end ifclear
418
419@kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
420@kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
421@cindex compatibility, MRI
422@item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
423@itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
ff5dcc92 424For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
252b5132 425files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
0285c67d
NC
426@ifclear man
427@ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
428@end ifclear
429@ifset man
430the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
431@end ifset
432Introduce MRI script files with
252b5132 433the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
ff5dcc92
SC
434scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
435If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
252b5132
RH
436specified by any @samp{-L} options.
437
438@cindex common allocation
439@kindex -d
440@kindex -dc
441@kindex -dp
a1ab1d2a 442@item -d
252b5132
RH
443@itemx -dc
444@itemx -dp
445These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
446compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
447even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
448script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
449@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
450
7ee314fa
AM
451@kindex --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
452@kindex -P @var{AUDITLIB}
453@item --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
454@itemx -P @var{AUDITLIB}
455Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
456@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
457specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_DEPAUDIT}
458will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. This
459option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.
9d5777a3 460The -P option is provided for Solaris compatibility.
7ee314fa 461
252b5132
RH
462@cindex entry point, from command line
463@kindex -e @var{entry}
464@kindex --entry=@var{entry}
a1ab1d2a 465@item -e @var{entry}
252b5132
RH
466@itemx --entry=@var{entry}
467Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
468program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
469named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
470and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
471base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
472@samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
473and other ways of specifying the entry point.
474
b58f81ae
DJ
475@kindex --exclude-libs
476@item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
477Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
e1c37eb5 478exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
b58f81ae
DJ
479@code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
480automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
481port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
482explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
483option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
484be treated as hidden.
485
e1c37eb5
DK
486@kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
487@item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
488Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
489should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
490into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
491may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
492used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
493the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
494match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
495command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
496of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
497regardless of this option.
498
252b5132
RH
499@cindex dynamic symbol table
500@kindex -E
501@kindex --export-dynamic
267e2722 502@kindex --no-export-dynamic
252b5132
RH
503@item -E
504@itemx --export-dynamic
267e2722
CD
505@itemx --no-export-dynamic
506When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the @option{-E}
507option or the @option{--export-dynamic} option causes the linker to add
508all symbols to the dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the
509set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
510
511If you do not use either of these options (or use the
512@option{--no-export-dynamic} option to restore the default behavior), the
513dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols which are
514referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
252b5132
RH
515
516If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
517back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
518dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
519linking the program itself.
520
55255dae 521You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
cb840a31 522be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
55255dae 523See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
cb840a31 524
8b747e1a
DK
525Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports. PE targets
526support a similar function to export all symbols from a DLL or EXE; see
527the description of @samp{--export-all-symbols} below.
528
36f63dca 529@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
530@cindex big-endian objects
531@cindex endianness
532@kindex -EB
533@item -EB
534Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
535
536@cindex little-endian objects
537@kindex -EL
538@item -EL
539Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
36f63dca 540@end ifclear
252b5132 541
2509a395
SL
542@kindex -f @var{name}
543@kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
544@item -f @var{name}
545@itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
546When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
547to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
548table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
549symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
550
551If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
552run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
553the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
554first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
555@var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
556in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
557Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
558implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
a094d01f 559machine-specific performance.
252b5132
RH
560
561This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
562will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
563
2509a395
SL
564@kindex -F @var{name}
565@kindex --filter=@var{name}
252b5132 566@item -F @var{name}
2509a395 567@itemx --filter=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
568When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
569the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
570of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
571on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
572
573If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
574run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
575dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
576filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
577found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
578used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
579@var{name}.
580
ff5dcc92 581Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
252b5132 582toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
36f63dca
NC
583object files.
584@ifclear SingleFormat
585The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
ece2d90e 586@option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
252b5132 587@code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
36f63dca
NC
588environment variable.
589@end ifclear
590The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
591creating an ELF shared object.
252b5132 592
3dbf70a2 593@cindex finalization function
2509a395
SL
594@kindex -fini=@var{name}
595@item -fini=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
596When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
597executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
598address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
599the function to call.
600
252b5132
RH
601@kindex -g
602@item -g
603Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
604
2509a395
SL
605@kindex -G @var{value}
606@kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
252b5132 607@cindex object size
2509a395 608@item -G @var{value}
252b5132
RH
609@itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
610Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
611@var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
e8044f35 612MIPS ELF that support putting large and small objects into different
252b5132
RH
613sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
614
615@cindex runtime library name
2509a395 616@kindex -h @var{name}
252b5132 617@kindex -soname=@var{name}
2509a395 618@item -h @var{name}
252b5132
RH
619@itemx -soname=@var{name}
620When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
621the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
622which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
623linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
624field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
625
626@kindex -i
627@cindex incremental link
628@item -i
629Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
630
3dbf70a2 631@cindex initialization function
2509a395
SL
632@kindex -init=@var{name}
633@item -init=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
634When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
635executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
636of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
637function to call.
638
252b5132 639@cindex archive files, from cmd line
2509a395 640@kindex -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf 641@kindex --library=@var{namespec}
2509a395 642@item -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf
RS
643@itemx --library=@var{namespec}
644Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
645list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
646If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
07d8eb55 647will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherwise it
bcb674cf 648will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
252b5132 649
ff5dcc92 650On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
bcb674cf
RS
651files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
652and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
653called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
654@file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
655indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
656to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
657@var{filename}.
252b5132
RH
658
659The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
660specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
661was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
662command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
663archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
664the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
665
ff5dcc92 666See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
252b5132
RH
667archives multiple times.
668
669You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
670
671@ifset GENERIC
672This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
ff5dcc92 673if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
252b5132
RH
674behaviour of the AIX linker.
675@end ifset
676
677@cindex search directory, from cmd line
2509a395 678@kindex -L @var{dir}
252b5132 679@kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
2509a395 680@item -L @var{searchdir}
252b5132 681@itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
ff5dcc92
SC
682Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
683for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
252b5132
RH
684option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
685in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
686on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
ff5dcc92 687@option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
7d24f02c
KH
688order in which the options appear. @option{-L} options do not affect
689how @command{ld} searches for a linker script unless @option{-T}
690option is specified.
252b5132 691
3aa2d05a
NC
692If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=} or @code{$SYSROOT}, then this
693prefix will be replaced by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, controlled by the
694@samp{--sysroot} option, or specified when the linker is configured.
9c8ebd6a 695
252b5132
RH
696@ifset UsesEnvVars
697The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
ff5dcc92 698@samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
252b5132
RH
699some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
700@end ifset
701
702The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
703@code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
704at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
705
706@cindex emulation
707@kindex -m @var{emulation}
2509a395 708@item -m @var{emulation}
252b5132
RH
709Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
710emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
711
712If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
713@code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
714
715Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
716configured.
717
718@cindex link map
719@kindex -M
720@kindex --print-map
721@item -M
722@itemx --print-map
723Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
724information about the link, including the following:
725
726@itemize @bullet
727@item
3b83e13a 728Where object files are mapped into memory.
252b5132
RH
729@item
730How common symbols are allocated.
731@item
732All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
733which caused the archive member to be brought in.
3b83e13a
NC
734@item
735The values assigned to symbols.
736
737Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
738involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
739have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
740linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
741of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
742the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
743linker script containing:
744
745@smallexample
746 foo = 1
747 foo = foo * 4
748 foo = foo + 8
749@end smallexample
750
751will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
752option is used:
753
754@smallexample
755 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
756 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
757 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
758@end smallexample
759
760See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
761scripts.
d2ef37eb 762
06ddcada
AM
763@item
764How GNU properties are merged.
d2ef37eb 765
06ddcada
AM
766When the linker merges input .note.gnu.property sections into one output
767.note.gnu.property section, some properties are removed or updated.
768These actions are reported in the link map. For example:
d2ef37eb
L
769
770@smallexample
771Removed property 0xc0000002 to merge foo.o (0x1) and bar.o (not found)
772@end smallexample
773
06ddcada 774This indicates that property 0xc0000002 is removed from output when
d2ef37eb
L
775merging properties in @file{foo.o}, whose property 0xc0000002 value
776is 0x1, and @file{bar.o}, which doesn't have property 0xc0000002.
777
778@smallexample
06ddcada 779Updated property 0xc0010001 (0x1) to merge foo.o (0x1) and bar.o (0x1)
d2ef37eb
L
780@end smallexample
781
06ddcada 782This indicates that property 0xc0010001 value is updated to 0x1 in output
d2ef37eb
L
783when merging properties in @file{foo.o}, whose 0xc0010001 property value
784is 0x1, and @file{bar.o}, whose 0xc0010001 property value is 0x1.
252b5132
RH
785@end itemize
786
035801ce
FS
787@cindex link map discarded
788@kindex --print-map-discarded
789@kindex --no-print-map-discarded
790@item --print-map-discarded
791@itemx --no-print-map-discarded
792Print (or do not print) the list of discarded and garbage collected sections
793in the link map. Enabled by default.
794
252b5132
RH
795@kindex -n
796@cindex read-only text
797@cindex NMAGIC
798@kindex --nmagic
799@item -n
800@itemx --nmagic
90f5d9d9
JZ
801Turn off page alignment of sections, and disable linking against shared
802libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
803mark the output as @code{NMAGIC}.
252b5132
RH
804
805@kindex -N
806@kindex --omagic
807@cindex read/write from cmd line
808@cindex OMAGIC
a1ab1d2a 809@item -N
252b5132
RH
810@itemx --omagic
811Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
63fd3b82
NC
812not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
813libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
4d8907ac
DS
814mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
815is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
816specification published by Microsoft.
63fd3b82
NC
817
818@kindex --no-omagic
819@cindex OMAGIC
820@item --no-omagic
821This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
822sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
823be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
824shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
252b5132
RH
825
826@kindex -o @var{output}
827@kindex --output=@var{output}
828@cindex naming the output file
829@item -o @var{output}
830@itemx --output=@var{output}
ff5dcc92 831Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
252b5132
RH
832option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
833script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
834
835@kindex -O @var{level}
836@cindex generating optimized output
837@item -O @var{level}
ff5dcc92 838If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
252b5132 839the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
98c503ac
NC
840should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
841option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
842the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
843no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
844of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
252b5132 845
387dd777
DP
846@kindex -plugin @var{name}
847@item -plugin @var{name}
848Involve a plugin in the linking process. The @var{name} parameter is
849the absolute filename of the plugin. Usually this parameter is
850automatically added by the complier, when using link time
851optimization, but users can also add their own plugins if they so
852wish.
853
854Note that the location of the compiler originated plugins is different
855from the place where the @command{ar}, @command{nm} and
856@command{ranlib} programs search for their plugins. In order for
857those commands to make use of a compiler based plugin it must first be
41f37a6f 858copied into the @file{$@{libdir@}/bfd-plugins} directory. All gcc
387dd777 859based linker plugins are backward compatible, so it is sufficient to
6c19b93b 860just copy in the newest one.
387dd777 861
26278bb8
UD
862@kindex --push-state
863@cindex push state governing input file handling
864@item --push-state
865The @option{--push-state} allows to preserve the current state of the
866flags which govern the input file handling so that they can all be
867restored with one corresponding @option{--pop-state} option.
868
869The option which are covered are: @option{-Bdynamic}, @option{-Bstatic},
870@option{-dn}, @option{-dy}, @option{-call_shared}, @option{-non_shared},
871@option{-static}, @option{-N}, @option{-n}, @option{--whole-archive},
872@option{--no-whole-archive}, @option{-r}, @option{-Ur},
873@option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}, @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries},
874@option{--as-needed}, @option{--no-as-needed}, and @option{-a}.
875
876One target for this option are specifications for @file{pkg-config}. When
877used with the @option{--libs} option all possibly needed libraries are
878listed and then possibly linked with all the time. It is better to return
879something as follows:
880
881@smallexample
882-Wl,--push-state,--as-needed -libone -libtwo -Wl,--pop-state
883@end smallexample
884
885@kindex --pop-state
886@cindex pop state governing input file handling
67cecaba 887@item --pop-state
26278bb8
UD
888Undoes the effect of --push-state, restores the previous values of the
889flags governing input file handling.
890
a712da20
NC
891@kindex -q
892@kindex --emit-relocs
893@cindex retain relocations in final executable
894@item -q
895@itemx --emit-relocs
ba1be17e 896Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
a712da20
NC
897Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
898order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
899in larger executables.
900
dbab7a7b
NC
901This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
902
4f471f39
RS
903@kindex --force-dynamic
904@cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
905@item --force-dynamic
906Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
907to VxWorks targets.
908
252b5132
RH
909@cindex partial link
910@cindex relocatable output
911@kindex -r
1049f94e 912@kindex --relocatable
252b5132 913@item -r
1049f94e 914@itemx --relocatable
252b5132 915Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 916turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
252b5132
RH
917linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
918magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
919@code{OMAGIC}.
ff5dcc92 920@c ; see @option{-N}.
252b5132
RH
921If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
922linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
923constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
924
62bf86b4
HPN
925When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
926partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
927relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
928example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
929with input files in other formats at all.
930
252b5132
RH
931This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
932
933@kindex -R @var{file}
934@kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
935@cindex symbol-only input
936@item -R @var{filename}
937@itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
938Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
939relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
940to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
941programs. You may use this option more than once.
942
ff5dcc92 943For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 944followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 945the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
946
947@kindex -s
948@kindex --strip-all
949@cindex strip all symbols
a1ab1d2a 950@item -s
252b5132
RH
951@itemx --strip-all
952Omit all symbol information from the output file.
953
954@kindex -S
955@kindex --strip-debug
956@cindex strip debugger symbols
a1ab1d2a 957@item -S
252b5132
RH
958@itemx --strip-debug
959Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
960
a70f34c0
NC
961@kindex --strip-discarded
962@kindex --no-strip-discarded
963@item --strip-discarded
964@itemx --no-strip-discarded
965Omit (or do not omit) global symbols defined in discarded sections.
966Enabled by default.
967
252b5132
RH
968@kindex -t
969@kindex --trace
970@cindex input files, displaying
a1ab1d2a 971@item -t
252b5132 972@itemx --trace
4f4690cd
AM
973Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them. If
974@samp{-t} is given twice then members within archives are also printed.
975@samp{-t} output is useful to generate a list of all the object files
976and scripts involved in linking, for example, when packaging files for
977a linker bug report.
252b5132
RH
978
979@kindex -T @var{script}
980@kindex --script=@var{script}
981@cindex script files
982@item -T @var{scriptfile}
983@itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
984Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
ff5dcc92 985@command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
252b5132 986@var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
114283d8
NC
987output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
988the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
989specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
990options accumulate.
252b5132 991
14be8564
L
992@kindex -dT @var{script}
993@kindex --default-script=@var{script}
994@cindex script files
995@item -dT @var{scriptfile}
996@itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
997Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
998
999This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
1000processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
1001command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
1002@option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
1003behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
1004command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
1005the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
1006@samp{gcc}).
1007
252b5132
RH
1008@kindex -u @var{symbol}
1009@kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
1010@cindex undefined symbol
1011@item -u @var{symbol}
1012@itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
1013Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
1014symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
1015modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
1016different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
1017option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
1018
0a618243
AB
1019If this option is being used to force additional modules to be pulled
1020into the link, and if it is an error for the symbol to remain
1021undefined, then the option @option{--require-defined} should be used
1022instead.
1023
1024@kindex --require-defined=@var{symbol}
1025@cindex symbols, require defined
1026@cindex defined symbol
1027@item --require-defined=@var{symbol}
1028Require that @var{symbol} is defined in the output file. This option
1029is the same as option @option{--undefined} except that if @var{symbol}
1030is not defined in the output file then the linker will issue an error
1031and exit. The same effect can be achieved in a linker script by using
1032@code{EXTERN}, @code{ASSERT} and @code{DEFINED} together. This option
1033can be used multiple times to require additional symbols.
1034
252b5132
RH
1035@kindex -Ur
1036@cindex constructors
a1ab1d2a 1037@item -Ur
252b5132
RH
1038For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
1039@samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 1040turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
252b5132
RH
1041@emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
1042It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
1043with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
1044be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
1045@samp{-r} for the others.
1046
c005eb9e
AB
1047@kindex --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1048@cindex orphan sections
1049@cindex sections, orphan
1050@item --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1051Control how orphan sections are handled. An orphan section is one not
1052specifically mentioned in a linker script. @xref{Orphan Sections}.
1053
1054@var{MODE} can have any of the following values:
1055
1056@table @code
1057@item place
1058Orphan sections are placed into a suitable output section following
1059the strategy described in @ref{Orphan Sections}. The option
d2732b69 1060@samp{--unique} also affects how sections are placed.
c005eb9e
AB
1061
1062@item discard
1063All orphan sections are discarded, by placing them in the
1064@samp{/DISCARD/} section (@pxref{Output Section Discarding}).
1065
1066@item warn
1067The linker will place the orphan section as for @code{place} and also
1068issue a warning.
1069
1070@item error
1071The linker will exit with an error if any orphan section is found.
1072@end table
1073
1074The default if @samp{--orphan-handling} is not given is @code{place}.
1075
577a0623
AM
1076@kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1077@item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1078Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
1079@var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
1080missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
1081specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
1082multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
1083input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
1084in a linker script.
a854a4a7 1085
252b5132
RH
1086@kindex -v
1087@kindex -V
1088@kindex --version
1089@cindex version
1090@item -v
1091@itemx --version
1092@itemx -V
ff5dcc92 1093Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
252b5132
RH
1094lists the supported emulations.
1095
1096@kindex -x
1097@kindex --discard-all
1098@cindex deleting local symbols
1099@item -x
1100@itemx --discard-all
1101Delete all local symbols.
1102
1103@kindex -X
1104@kindex --discard-locals
1105@cindex local symbols, deleting
a1ab1d2a 1106@item -X
252b5132 1107@itemx --discard-locals
3c68c38f
BW
1108Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
1109system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
1110or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
252b5132
RH
1111
1112@kindex -y @var{symbol}
1113@kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1114@cindex symbol tracing
1115@item -y @var{symbol}
1116@itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1117Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
1118option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
1119to prepend an underscore.
1120
1121This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
1122don't know where the reference is coming from.
1123
1124@kindex -Y @var{path}
1125@item -Y @var{path}
1126Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
1127for Solaris compatibility.
1128
1129@kindex -z @var{keyword}
1130@item -z @var{keyword}
cd6d6c15
NC
1131The recognized keywords are:
1132@table @samp
1133
e6e2dfbd
AM
1134@item bndplt
1135Always generate BND prefix in PLT entries. Supported for Linux/x86_64.
1136
1137@item call-nop=prefix-addr
1138@itemx call-nop=suffix-nop
1139@itemx call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}
1140@itemx call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}
1141Specify the 1-byte @code{NOP} padding when transforming indirect call
1142to a locally defined function, foo, via its GOT slot.
1143@option{call-nop=prefix-addr} generates @code{0x67 call foo}.
1144@option{call-nop=suffix-nop} generates @code{call foo 0x90}.
1145@option{call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}} generates @code{@var{byte} call foo}.
1146@option{call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}} generates @code{call foo @var{byte}}.
1147Supported for i386 and x86_64.
1148
233a0083
L
1149@item cet-report=none
1150@itemx cet-report=warning
1151@itemx cet-report=error
1152Specify how to report the missing GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_IBT and
1153GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_SHSTK properties in input .note.gnu.property
1154section. @option{cet-report=none}, which is the default, will make the
1155linker not report missing properties in input files.
1156@option{cet-report=warning} will make the linker issue a warning for
1157missing properties in input files. @option{cet-report=error} will make
1158the linker issue an error for missing properties in input files.
1159Note that @option{ibt} will turn off the missing
1160GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_IBT property report and @option{shstk} will
1161turn off the missing GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_SHSTK property report.
1162Supported for Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1163
cd6d6c15 1164@item combreloc
e6e2dfbd
AM
1165@itemx nocombreloc
1166Combine multiple dynamic relocation sections and sort to improve
1167dynamic symbol lookup caching. Do not do this if @samp{nocombreloc}.
cd6d6c15 1168
b8871f35 1169@item common
e6e2dfbd
AM
1170@itemx nocommon
1171Generate common symbols with STT_COMMON type during a relocatable
1172link. Use STT_OBJECT type if @samp{nocommon}.
1173
1174@item common-page-size=@var{value}
1175Set the page size most commonly used to @var{value}. Memory image
1176layout will be optimized to minimize memory pages if the system is
1177using pages of this size.
b8871f35 1178
cd6d6c15 1179@item defs
97a232d7
NC
1180Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1181is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1182This option is the inverse of @samp{-z undefs}.
cd6d6c15 1183
e6e2dfbd
AM
1184@item dynamic-undefined-weak
1185@itemx nodynamic-undefined-weak
1186Make undefined weak symbols dynamic when building a dynamic object,
1187if they are referenced from a regular object file and not forced local
1188by symbol visibility or versioning. Do not make them dynamic if
1189@samp{nodynamic-undefined-weak}. If neither option is given, a target
1190may default to either option being in force, or make some other
1191selection of undefined weak symbols dynamic. Not all targets support
1192these options.
1193
6aa29e7b
JJ
1194@item execstack
1195Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
1196
b039ef04
L
1197@item global
1198This option is only meaningful when building a shared object. It makes
1199the symbols defined by this shared object available for symbol resolution
1200of subsequently loaded libraries.
1201
93ab9c0d
NC
1202@item globalaudit
1203This option is only meaningful when building a dynamic executable.
1204This option marks the executable as requiring global auditing by
1205setting the @code{DF_1_GLOBAUDIT} bit in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} dynamic
1206tag. Global auditing requires that any auditing library defined via
a05a5b64 1207the @option{--depaudit} or @option{-P} command-line options be run for
6c19b93b 1208all dynamic objects loaded by the application.
93ab9c0d 1209
e6e2dfbd
AM
1210@item ibtplt
1211Generate Intel Indirect Branch Tracking (IBT) enabled PLT entries.
1212Supported for Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1213
8df93cb5 1214@item ibt
e6e2dfbd
AM
1215Generate GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_IBT in .note.gnu.property section
1216to indicate compatibility with IBT. This also implies @option{ibtplt}.
1217Supported for Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1218
cd6d6c15
NC
1219@item initfirst
1220This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
1221It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
1222before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
1223the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
1224the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
1225objects.
1226
1227@item interpose
e6e2dfbd
AM
1228Specify that the dynamic loader should modify its symbol search order
1229so that symbols in this shared library interpose all other shared
1230libraries not so marked.
cd6d6c15 1231
5fa222e4
AM
1232@item lazy
1233When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1234dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
1235the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1236Lazy binding is the default.
1237
cd6d6c15 1238@item loadfltr
e6e2dfbd 1239Specify that the object's filters be processed immediately at runtime.
cd6d6c15 1240
e6e2dfbd
AM
1241@item max-page-size=@var{value}
1242Set the maximum memory page size supported to @var{value}.
cd6d6c15 1243
e6e2dfbd
AM
1244@item muldefs
1245Allow multiple definitions.
b8871f35 1246
cd6d6c15 1247@item nocopyreloc
daf220f0
AM
1248Disable linker generated .dynbss variables used in place of variables
1249defined in shared libraries. May result in dynamic text relocations.
cd6d6c15
NC
1250
1251@item nodefaultlib
e6e2dfbd
AM
1252Specify that the dynamic loader search for dependencies of this object
1253should ignore any default library search paths.
cd6d6c15
NC
1254
1255@item nodelete
e6e2dfbd 1256Specify that the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
cd6d6c15
NC
1257
1258@item nodlopen
e6e2dfbd 1259Specify that the object is not available to @code{dlopen}.
cd6d6c15
NC
1260
1261@item nodump
e6e2dfbd 1262Specify that the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
cd6d6c15 1263
6aa29e7b
JJ
1264@item noexecstack
1265Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1266
e6e2dfbd
AM
1267@item noextern-protected-data
1268Don't treat protected data symbols as external when building a shared
1269library. This option overrides the linker backend default. It can be
1270used to work around incorrect relocations against protected data symbols
1271generated by compiler. Updates on protected data symbols by another
1272module aren't visible to the resulting shared library. Supported for
1273i386 and x86-64.
8dfef1bd 1274
e6e2dfbd
AM
1275@item noreloc-overflow
1276Disable relocation overflow check. This can be used to disable
1277relocation overflow check if there will be no dynamic relocation
1278overflow at run-time. Supported for x86_64.
6aa29e7b 1279
cd6d6c15
NC
1280@item now
1281When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1282dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
e6e2dfbd
AM
1283when the shared library is loaded by dlopen, instead of deferring
1284function call resolution to the point when the function is first
1285called.
cd6d6c15
NC
1286
1287@item origin
e6e2dfbd 1288Specify that the object requires @samp{$ORIGIN} handling in paths.
cd6d6c15 1289
6aa29e7b 1290@item relro
e6e2dfbd 1291@itemx norelro
def5c83c
AM
1292Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object. This
1293specifies a memory segment that should be made read-only after
1294relocation, if supported. Specifying @samp{common-page-size} smaller
1295than the system page size will render this protection ineffective.
e6e2dfbd 1296Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment if @samp{norelro}.
6aa29e7b 1297
47acac12
L
1298@item separate-code
1299@itemx noseparate-code
1300Create separate code @code{PT_LOAD} segment header in the object. This
1301specifies a memory segment that should contain only instructions and must
1302be in wholly disjoint pages from any other data. Don't create separate
1303code @code{PT_LOAD} segment if @samp{noseparate-code} is used.
1304
e6e2dfbd
AM
1305@item shstk
1306Generate GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_SHSTK in .note.gnu.property section
1307to indicate compatibility with Intel Shadow Stack. Supported for
1308Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
24718e3b 1309
04c3a755 1310@item stack-size=@var{value}
e6e2dfbd 1311Specify a stack size for an ELF @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment.
04c3a755
NS
1312Specifying zero will override any default non-zero sized
1313@code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment creation.
1314
e6e2dfbd
AM
1315@item text
1316@itemx notext
1317@itemx textoff
1318Report an error if DT_TEXTREL is set, i.e., if the binary has dynamic
1319relocations in read-only sections. Don't report an error if
1320@samp{notext} or @samp{textoff}.
48580982 1321
97a232d7
NC
1322@item undefs
1323Do not report unresolved symbol references from regular object files,
1324either when creating an executable, or when creating a shared library.
1325This option is the inverse of @samp{-z defs}.
1326
cd6d6c15
NC
1327@end table
1328
ece2d90e 1329Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
252b5132
RH
1330
1331@kindex -(
1332@cindex groups of archives
1333@item -( @var{archives} -)
1334@itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1335The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1336either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1337
1338The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1339references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1340the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1341archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1342object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1343would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
5d3db3e2 1344they will all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
252b5132
RH
1345resolved.
1346
1347Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1348it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1349more archives.
1350
69da35b5
NC
1351@kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1352@kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1353@item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1354@itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1355Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
2ca22b03 1356recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
69da35b5
NC
1357and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1358the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1359behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1360so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1361restore the old behaviour.
2ca22b03 1362
4a43e768
AM
1363@kindex --as-needed
1364@kindex --no-as-needed
1365@item --as-needed
1366@itemx --no-as-needed
1367This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
ddbb8a31 1368on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally
4a43e768
AM
1369the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1370on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
ddbb8a31 1371needed or not. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be
ffa9430d
AM
1372emitted for a library that @emph{at that point in the link} satisfies a
1373non-weak undefined symbol reference from a regular object file or, if
1240be6b
AM
1374the library is not found in the DT_NEEDED lists of other needed libraries, a
1375non-weak undefined symbol reference from another needed dynamic library.
ffa9430d
AM
1376Object files or libraries appearing on the command line @emph{after}
1377the library in question do not affect whether the library is seen as
1378needed. This is similar to the rules for extraction of object files
1379from archives. @option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
4a43e768 1380
e56f61be
L
1381@kindex --add-needed
1382@kindex --no-add-needed
1383@item --add-needed
1384@itemx --no-add-needed
ddbb8a31
NC
1385These two options have been deprecated because of the similarity of
1386their names to the @option{--as-needed} and @option{--no-as-needed}
1387options. They have been replaced by @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1388and @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
e56f61be 1389
252b5132
RH
1390@kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1391@item -assert @var{keyword}
1392This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1393
1394@kindex -Bdynamic
1395@kindex -dy
1396@kindex -call_shared
1397@item -Bdynamic
1398@itemx -dy
1399@itemx -call_shared
1400Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1401for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1402default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1403for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1404multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
da8bce14 1405@option{-l} options which follow it.
252b5132 1406
a1ab1d2a
UD
1407@kindex -Bgroup
1408@item -Bgroup
1409Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1410section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1411object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
560e09e9
NC
1412@option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1413only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
a1ab1d2a 1414
252b5132
RH
1415@kindex -Bstatic
1416@kindex -dn
1417@kindex -non_shared
1418@kindex -static
a1ab1d2a 1419@item -Bstatic
252b5132
RH
1420@itemx -dn
1421@itemx -non_shared
1422@itemx -static
1423Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1424platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1425variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1426may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
560e09e9 1427library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
e9156f74
NC
1428option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1429option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1430shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1431references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
ece2d90e 1432libraries.
252b5132
RH
1433
1434@kindex -Bsymbolic
1435@item -Bsymbolic
1436When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1437definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1438for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
1914e264
AM
1439within the shared library. This option is only meaningful on ELF
1440platforms which support shared libraries.
252b5132 1441
40b36307
L
1442@kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1443@item -Bsymbolic-functions
1444When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
c0065db7 1445symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
40b36307 1446This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
1914e264 1447libraries.
40b36307 1448
55255dae
L
1449@kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1450@item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1451Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1452typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1453global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1454within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1455to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1456in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1457which support shared libraries.
1458
1459The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1460scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1461
40b36307
L
1462@kindex --dynamic-list-data
1463@item --dynamic-list-data
1464Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1465
1466@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1467@item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1468Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1469is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1470
0b8a70d9
L
1471@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1472@item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1473Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1474
252b5132
RH
1475@kindex --check-sections
1476@kindex --no-check-sections
1477@item --check-sections
308b1ffd 1478@itemx --no-check-sections
252b5132 1479Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
7d816a17 1480been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
252b5132
RH
1481perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1482suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1483allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
a05a5b64 1484restored by using the command-line switch @option{--check-sections}.
02b0b1aa
NS
1485Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
1486force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1487option.
252b5132 1488
ddbb8a31
NC
1489@kindex --copy-dt-needed-entries
1490@kindex --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1491@item --copy-dt-needed-entries
1492@itemx --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
9d5777a3 1493This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries referred to
ddbb8a31 1494by DT_NEEDED tags @emph{inside} ELF dynamic libraries mentioned on the
08efffb8 1495command line. Normally the linker won't add a DT_NEEDED tag to the
ddbb8a31 1496output binary for each library mentioned in a DT_NEEDED tag in an
08efffb8 1497input dynamic library. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
ddbb8a31 1498specified on the command line however any dynamic libraries that
08efffb8
MM
1499follow it will have their DT_NEEDED entries added. The default
1500behaviour can be restored with @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
ddbb8a31
NC
1501
1502This option also has an effect on the resolution of symbols in dynamic
08efffb8
MM
1503libraries. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries} dynamic libraries
1504mentioned on the command line will be recursively searched, following
1505their DT_NEEDED tags to other libraries, in order to resolve symbols
1506required by the output binary. With the default setting however
1507the searching of dynamic libraries that follow it will stop with the
1508dynamic library itself. No DT_NEEDED links will be traversed to resolve
ddbb8a31
NC
1509symbols.
1510
252b5132
RH
1511@cindex cross reference table
1512@kindex --cref
1513@item --cref
1514Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1515generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1516Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1517
1518The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1519easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1520sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1521symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
049c1c8e
NC
1522definition. If the symbol is defined as a common value then any files
1523where this happens appear next. Finally any files that reference the
1524symbol are listed.
252b5132 1525
4818e05f
AM
1526@cindex common allocation
1527@kindex --no-define-common
1528@item --no-define-common
1529This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1530The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1531@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1532
1533The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1534the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1535of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1536forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1537Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1538from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1539This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1540and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1541duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1542paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1543
7bdf4127
AB
1544@cindex group allocation in linker script
1545@cindex section groups
1546@cindex COMDAT
1547@kindex --force-group-allocation
1548@item --force-group-allocation
1549This option causes the linker to place section group members like
1550normal input sections, and to delete the section groups. This is the
1551default behaviour for a final link but this option can be used to
1552change the behaviour of a relocatable link (@samp{-r}). The script
1553command @code{FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION} has the same
1554effect. @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1555
252b5132 1556@cindex symbols, from command line
2509a395
SL
1557@kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1558@item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
252b5132
RH
1559Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1560address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1561times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1562limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1563context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1564symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1565constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
66bc8739
AM
1566using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments}).
1567@emph{Note:} there should be no white space between @var{symbol}, the
1568equals sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{expression}.
252b5132
RH
1569
1570@cindex demangling, from command line
28c309a2 1571@kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132 1572@kindex --no-demangle
28c309a2 1573@item --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132
RH
1574@itemx --no-demangle
1575These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1576and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1577present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1578underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
a1ab1d2a
UD
1579mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1580different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1581to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
28c309a2
NC
1582demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1583is set. These options may be used to override the default.
252b5132
RH
1584
1585@cindex dynamic linker, from command line
506eee22 1586@kindex -I@var{file}
2509a395
SL
1587@kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1588@item -I@var{file}
1589@itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
252b5132
RH
1590Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1591generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1592linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1593doing.
1594
9b8b325a
RF
1595@kindex --no-dynamic-linker
1596@item --no-dynamic-linker
1597When producing an executable file, omit the request for a dynamic
1598linker to be used at load-time. This is only meaningful for ELF
1599executables that contain dynamic relocations, and usually requires
1600entry point code that is capable of processing these relocations.
1601
a70f34c0
NC
1602@kindex --embedded-relocs
1603@item --embedded-relocs
1604This option is similar to the @option{--emit-relocs} option except
a094d01f 1605that the relocs are stored in a target-specific section. This option
a70f34c0
NC
1606is only supported by the @samp{BFIN}, @samp{CR16} and @emph{M68K}
1607targets.
1608
3f0a5f17
ME
1609@kindex --disable-multiple-abs-defs
1610@item --disable-multiple-abs-defs
1611Do not allow multiple definitions with symbols included
1612in filename invoked by -R or --just-symbols
1613
7ce691ae 1614@kindex --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd 1615@kindex --no-fatal-warnings
7ce691ae 1616@item --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd
NC
1617@itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1618Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1619with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
7ce691ae 1620
252b5132
RH
1621@kindex --force-exe-suffix
1622@item --force-exe-suffix
1623Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1624
1625If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1626@code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1627the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1628option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1629Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1630it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1631
1632@kindex --gc-sections
1633@kindex --no-gc-sections
1634@cindex garbage collection
c17d87de
NC
1635@item --gc-sections
1636@itemx --no-gc-sections
252b5132 1637Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
ac69cbc6 1638targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
b3549761 1639performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
0f088b2a
KT
1640@samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line. Note that garbage
1641collection for COFF and PE format targets is supported, but the
1642implementation is currently considered to be experimental.
252b5132 1643
d5465ba2
AM
1644@samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1645examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1646symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1647command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1648referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1649libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1650referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1651the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
b69e1ff3
CC
1652relocations. See @samp{--entry}, @samp{--undefined}, and
1653@samp{--gc-keep-exported}.
d5465ba2 1654
ac69cbc6 1655This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
9d5777a3 1656@samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitly
b69e1ff3
CC
1657specified either by one of the options @samp{--entry},
1658@samp{--undefined}, or @samp{--gc-keep-exported} or by a @code{ENTRY}
1659command in the linker script.
ac69cbc6 1660
c17d87de
NC
1661@kindex --print-gc-sections
1662@kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1663@cindex garbage collection
1664@item --print-gc-sections
1665@itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1666List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1667printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1668collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1669default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1670be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1671line.
1672
22185505 1673@kindex --gc-keep-exported
1674@cindex garbage collection
1675@item --gc-keep-exported
1676When @samp{--gc-sections} is enabled, this option prevents garbage
1677collection of unused input sections that contain global symbols having
1678default or protected visibility. This option is intended to be used for
1679executables where unreferenced sections would otherwise be garbage
1680collected regardless of the external visibility of contained symbols.
1681Note that this option has no effect when linking shared objects since
1682it is already the default behaviour. This option is only supported for
1683ELF format targets.
1684
30824704
RM
1685@kindex --print-output-format
1686@cindex output format
1687@item --print-output-format
1688Print the name of the default output format (perhaps influenced by
1689other command-line options). This is the string that would appear
1690in an @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} linker script command (@pxref{File Commands}).
1691
3604cb1f
TG
1692@kindex --print-memory-usage
1693@cindex memory usage
1694@item --print-memory-usage
1695Print used size, total size and used size of memory regions created with
1696the @ref{MEMORY} command. This is useful on embedded targets to have a
1697quick view of amount of free memory. The format of the output has one
1698headline and one line per region. It is both human readable and easily
1699parsable by tools. Here is an example of an output:
1700
1701@smallexample
1702Memory region Used Size Region Size %age Used
1703 ROM: 256 KB 1 MB 25.00%
1704 RAM: 32 B 2 GB 0.00%
1705@end smallexample
1706
252b5132
RH
1707@cindex help
1708@cindex usage
1709@kindex --help
1710@item --help
1711Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1712
ea20a7da
CC
1713@kindex --target-help
1714@item --target-help
a094d01f 1715Print a summary of all target-specific options on the standard output and exit.
ea20a7da 1716
2509a395
SL
1717@kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
1718@item -Map=@var{mapfile}
252b5132 1719Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
560e09e9 1720@option{-M} option, above.
252b5132
RH
1721
1722@cindex memory usage
1723@kindex --no-keep-memory
1724@item --no-keep-memory
ff5dcc92
SC
1725@command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1726symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
252b5132 1727instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
ff5dcc92 1728necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
252b5132
RH
1729while linking a large executable.
1730
1731@kindex --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1732@kindex -z defs
97a232d7 1733@kindex -z undefs
252b5132 1734@item --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1735@itemx -z defs
560e09e9
NC
1736Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1737is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1738The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1739behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
ece2d90e 1740libraries being linked in.
252b5132 1741
97a232d7
NC
1742The effects of this option can be reverted by using @code{-z undefs}.
1743
aa713662
L
1744@kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1745@kindex -z muldefs
1746@item --allow-multiple-definition
1747@itemx -z muldefs
1748Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1749report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1750first definition will be used.
1751
b79e8c78 1752@kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1753@kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
b79e8c78 1754@item --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1755@itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
903249d7 1756Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
560e09e9
NC
1757This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1758determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1759shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1760how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1761
903249d7
NC
1762The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1763referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1764an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1765a shared library.
1766
1767The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1768libraries specified at link time are that:
1769
1770@itemize @bullet
1771@item
1772A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1773that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1774resolvable at load time.
1775@item
1776There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1777symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1778
1779The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1780select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1781architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1782appropriate memset function.
1783@end itemize
b79e8c78 1784
31941635
L
1785@kindex --no-undefined-version
1786@item --no-undefined-version
1787Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1788it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1789will be issued instead.
1790
3e3b46e5
PB
1791@kindex --default-symver
1792@item --default-symver
1793Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
fc0e6df6
PB
1794exported symbols.
1795
1796@kindex --default-imported-symver
1797@item --default-imported-symver
1798Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1799imported symbols.
3e3b46e5 1800
252b5132
RH
1801@kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1802@item --no-warn-mismatch
ff5dcc92 1803Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
252b5132
RH
1804files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1805been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
ff5dcc92 1806This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
252b5132
RH
1807errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1808have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1809inappropriate.
1810
fe7929ce
AM
1811@kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1812@item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1813Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1814library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1815
252b5132
RH
1816@kindex --no-whole-archive
1817@item --no-whole-archive
ff5dcc92 1818Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
252b5132
RH
1819archive files.
1820
1821@cindex output file after errors
1822@kindex --noinhibit-exec
1823@item --noinhibit-exec
1824Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1825Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1826errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1827when it issues any error whatsoever.
1828
0a9c1c8e
CD
1829@kindex -nostdlib
1830@item -nostdlib
1831Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1832command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1833(including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1834
252b5132 1835@ifclear SingleFormat
2509a395
SL
1836@kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
1837@item --oformat=@var{output-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
1838@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1839file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 1840@samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
ff5dcc92
SC
1841object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1842object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
1843should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1844usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1845name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1846list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1847command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1848this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1849@end ifclear
1850
76359541
TP
1851@kindex --out-implib
1852@item --out-implib @var{file}
1853Create an import library in @var{file} corresponding to the executable
1854the linker is generating (eg. a DLL or ELF program). This import
1855library (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a} for DLLs)
1856may be used to link clients against the generated executable; this
1857behaviour makes it possible to skip a separate import library creation
1858step (eg. @code{dlltool} for DLLs). This option is only available for
1859the i386 PE and ELF targetted ports of the linker.
1860
36af4a4e
JJ
1861@kindex -pie
1862@kindex --pic-executable
1863@item -pie
1864@itemx --pic-executable
1865@cindex position independent executables
1866Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1867ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1868libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
7e7d5768 1869address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
36af4a4e
JJ
1870normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1871defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1872
252b5132
RH
1873@kindex -qmagic
1874@item -qmagic
1875This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1876
1877@kindex -Qy
1878@item -Qy
1879This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1880
1881@kindex --relax
1882@cindex synthesizing linker
1883@cindex relaxing addressing modes
28d5f677 1884@cindex --no-relax
252b5132 1885@item --relax
28d5f677 1886@itemx --no-relax
a1ab1d2a 1887An option with machine dependent effects.
252b5132
RH
1888@ifset GENERIC
1889This option is only supported on a few targets.
1890@end ifset
1891@ifset H8300
ff5dcc92 1892@xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
252b5132 1893@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
1894@ifset XTENSA
1895@xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1896@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
1897@ifset M68HC11
1898@xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1899@end ifset
78058a5e
SL
1900@ifset NIOSII
1901@xref{Nios II,,@command{ld} and the Altera Nios II}.
1902@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
1903@ifset POWERPC
1904@xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1905@end ifset
252b5132 1906
a094d01f 1907On some platforms the @samp{--relax} option performs target-specific,
28d5f677
NC
1908global optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
1909addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes,
1910synthesizing new instructions, selecting shorter version of current
11e7fd74 1911instructions, and combining constant values.
252b5132
RH
1912
1913On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1914debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1915@ifset GENERIC
28d5f677
NC
1916This is known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300
1917family of processors.
252b5132
RH
1918@end ifset
1919
1920@ifset GENERIC
1921On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1922but ignored.
1923@end ifset
1924
28d5f677
NC
1925On platforms where @samp{--relax} is accepted the option
1926@samp{--no-relax} can be used to disable the feature.
1927
252b5132
RH
1928@cindex retaining specified symbols
1929@cindex stripping all but some symbols
1930@cindex symbols, retaining selectively
2509a395
SL
1931@kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1932@item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
252b5132
RH
1933Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1934discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1935symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1936@ifset GENERIC
1937(such as VxWorks)
1938@end ifset
1939where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1940run-time memory.
1941
1942@samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1943or symbols needed for relocations.
1944
1945You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1946line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1947
1948@ifset GENERIC
2509a395 1949@item -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1950@cindex runtime library search path
2509a395 1951@kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1952Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
ff5dcc92 1953linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
252b5132 1954arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
c1b00498
MR
1955them to locate shared objects at runtime.
1956
1957The @option{-rpath} option is also used when locating shared objects which
1958are needed by shared objects explicitly included in the link; see the
1959description of the @option{-rpath-link} option. Searching @option{-rpath}
1960in this way is only supported by native linkers and cross linkers which
1961have been configured with the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
1962
1963If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an ELF executable, the
1964contents of the environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it
1965is defined.
252b5132 1966
ff5dcc92 1967The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
d8506323 1968SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search path out of all the
ff5dcc92
SC
1969@option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
1970runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
1971options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
1972gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
b45619c0 1973file systems.
252b5132 1974
ff5dcc92 1975For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 1976followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 1977the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
1978@end ifset
1979
1980@ifset GENERIC
1981@cindex link-time runtime library search path
2509a395
SL
1982@kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1983@item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
252b5132
RH
1984When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
1985happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
1986of the input files.
1987
1988When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
1989non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
1990shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
ff5dcc92 1991explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
252b5132 1992specifies the first set of directories to search. The
ff5dcc92 1993@option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
252b5132
RH
1994either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
1995appearing multiple times.
1996
e680a6b6
NC
1997The tokens @var{$ORIGIN} and @var{$LIB} can appear in these search
1998directories. They will be replaced by the full path to the directory
1999containing the program or shared object in the case of @var{$ORIGIN}
2000and either @samp{lib} - for 32-bit binaries - or @samp{lib64} - for
200164-bit binaries - in the case of @var{$LIB}.
2002
2003The alternative form of these tokens - @var{$@{ORIGIN@}} and
2004@var{$@{LIB@}} can also be used. The token @var{$PLATFORM} is not
2005supported.
2006
28c309a2
NC
2007This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
2008that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
2009is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
2010runtime linker would do.
2011
252b5132 2012The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
ece2d90e 2013libraries:
252b5132
RH
2014@enumerate
2015@item
ff5dcc92 2016Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
252b5132 2017@item
ff5dcc92
SC
2018Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
2019between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
2020specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
2021used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
ece2d90e
NC
2022at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
2023by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
2024the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
252b5132 2025@item
e2a83dd0
NC
2026On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
2027@option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
2028environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
252b5132 2029@item
ff5dcc92
SC
2030On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
2031directories specified using @option{-L} options.
252b5132 2032@item
a1b8d843 2033For a native linker, search the contents of the environment
e2a83dd0 2034variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
252b5132 2035@item
ec4eb78a
L
2036For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
2037@code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
2038libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
2039@code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
2040@item
252b5132
RH
2041The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
2042@item
2043For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
2044exists, the list of directories found in that file.
2045@end enumerate
2046
2047If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
2048warning and continue with the link.
2049@end ifset
2050
2051@kindex -shared
2052@kindex -Bshareable
2053@item -shared
2054@itemx -Bshareable
2055@cindex shared libraries
2056Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
2057and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
ff5dcc92 2058shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
252b5132
RH
2059undefined symbols in the link.
2060
252b5132 2061@kindex --sort-common
2509a395
SL
2062@item --sort-common
2063@itemx --sort-common=ascending
2064@itemx --sort-common=descending
de7dd2bd
NC
2065This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
2066ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
2067sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
2068eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
2069between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
2070specified, then descending order is assumed.
252b5132 2071
2509a395
SL
2072@kindex --sort-section=name
2073@item --sort-section=name
bcaa7b3e
L
2074This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
2075patterns in the linker script.
2076
2509a395
SL
2077@kindex --sort-section=alignment
2078@item --sort-section=alignment
bcaa7b3e
L
2079This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
2080patterns in the linker script.
2081
a70f34c0
NC
2082@kindex --spare-dynamic-tags
2083@item --spare-dynamic-tags=@var{count}
2084This option specifies the number of empty slots to leave in the
2085.dynamic section of ELF shared objects. Empty slots may be needed by
2086post processing tools, such as the prelinker. The default is 5.
2087
252b5132 2088@kindex --split-by-file
2509a395 2089@item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
ff5dcc92 2090Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
a854a4a7
AM
2091each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
2092size of 1 if not given.
252b5132
RH
2093
2094@kindex --split-by-reloc
2509a395 2095@item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
a854a4a7 2096Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
252b5132 2097output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
a854a4a7 2098This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
252b5132
RH
2099certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
2100cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
2101that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
2102support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
2103input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
2104more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
a854a4a7 2105many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
252b5132
RH
2106
2107@kindex --stats
2108@item --stats
2109Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
2110as execution time and memory usage.
2111
2509a395 2112@kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
e2243057
RS
2113@item --sysroot=@var{directory}
2114Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
2115configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
2116that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
2117
a70f34c0
NC
2118@kindex --task-link
2119@item --task-link
2120This is used by COFF/PE based targets to create a task-linked object
2121file where all of the global symbols have been converted to statics.
2122
252b5132
RH
2123@kindex --traditional-format
2124@cindex traditional format
2125@item --traditional-format
ff5dcc92
SC
2126For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
2127the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
252b5132
RH
2128use the traditional format instead.
2129
2130@cindex dbx
ff5dcc92 2131For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
252b5132
RH
2132symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
2133full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
2134@code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
ff5dcc92 2135trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
252b5132
RH
2136combine duplicate entries.
2137
2509a395
SL
2138@kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
2139@item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
176355da
NC
2140Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
2141address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
2142times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
2143line.
2144@var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
2145for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
2146@samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
2147should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
2148sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
2149
2509a395
SL
2150@kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
2151@kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
2152@kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
252b5132 2153@cindex segment origins, cmd line
2509a395
SL
2154@item -Tbss=@var{org}
2155@itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
2156@itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
2157Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
a6e02871 2158@code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
252b5132 2159
2509a395
SL
2160@kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
2161@item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
258795f5 2162@cindex text segment origin, cmd line
2b8c06a3
L
2163When creating an ELF executable, it will set the address of the first
2164byte of the text segment.
258795f5 2165
9d5777a3
RM
2166@kindex -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
2167@item -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
2168@cindex rodata segment origin, cmd line
2169When creating an ELF executable or shared object for a target where
2170the read-only data is in its own segment separate from the executable
2171text, it will set the address of the first byte of the read-only data segment.
2172
0d705e9f
AM
2173@kindex -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
2174@item -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
2175@cindex ldata segment origin, cmd line
2176When creating an ELF executable or shared object for x86-64 medium memory
2177model, it will set the address of the first byte of the ldata segment.
2178
560e09e9
NC
2179@kindex --unresolved-symbols
2180@item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
2181Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
2182values for @samp{method}:
2183
2184@table @samp
2185@item ignore-all
da8bce14 2186Do not report any unresolved symbols.
560e09e9
NC
2187
2188@item report-all
da8bce14 2189Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
560e09e9
NC
2190
2191@item ignore-in-object-files
2192Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
2193ignore them if they come from regular object files.
2194
2195@item ignore-in-shared-libs
2196Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
2197ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
2198when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
2199libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
2200command line.
2201@end table
2202
2203The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
2204by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
2205
2206Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
2207unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
2208can change this to a warning.
2209
1715a13c
L
2210@kindex --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2211@cindex verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
252b5132 2212@item --dll-verbose
1715a13c 2213@itemx --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
ff5dcc92 2214Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
252b5132 2215supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
1715a13c
L
2216the linker script being used by the linker. If the optional @var{NUMBER}
2217argument > 1, plugin symbol status will also be displayed.
252b5132
RH
2218
2219@kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
2220@cindex version script, symbol versions
2509a395 2221@item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
252b5132
RH
2222Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
2223used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
36f63dca 2224about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
09e2aba4
DK
2225is only fully supported on ELF platforms which support shared libraries;
2226see @ref{VERSION}. It is partially supported on PE platforms, which can
2227use version scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any
2228symbols marked @samp{local} in the version script will not be exported.
2229@xref{WIN32}.
252b5132 2230
7ce691ae 2231@kindex --warn-common
252b5132
RH
2232@cindex warnings, on combining symbols
2233@cindex combining symbols, warnings on
2234@item --warn-common
2235Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
11e7fd74 2236a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practice,
252b5132
RH
2237but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
2238you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
11e7fd74 2239Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practice, so you may get some
252b5132
RH
2240warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
2241
2242There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
2243
2244@table @samp
2245@item int i = 1;
2246A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
2247file.
2248
2249@item extern int i;
2250An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
2251There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
2252variable somewhere.
2253
2254@item int i;
2255A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
2256variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
2257The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
2258single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
2259size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
2260a definition of the same variable.
2261@end table
2262
2263The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
2264Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
2265just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
2266encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
2267a common symbol.
2268
2269@enumerate
2270@item
2271Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
2272definition for the symbol.
2273@smallexample
2274@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2275 overridden by definition
2276@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
2277@end smallexample
2278
2279@item
2280Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
2281the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
2282except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
2283@smallexample
2284@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
2285 overriding common
2286@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
2287@end smallexample
2288
2289@item
2290Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
2291@smallexample
2292@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
2293 of `@var{symbol}'
2294@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
2295@end smallexample
2296
2297@item
2298Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
2299@smallexample
2300@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2301 overridden by larger common
2302@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
2303@end smallexample
2304
2305@item
2306Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
2307the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
2308encountered in a different order.
2309@smallexample
2310@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2311 overriding smaller common
2312@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
2313@end smallexample
2314@end enumerate
2315
2316@kindex --warn-constructors
2317@item --warn-constructors
2318Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
2319object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
2320detect the use of global constructors.
2321
2322@kindex --warn-multiple-gp
2323@item --warn-multiple-gp
2324Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
2325This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
2326Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
2327section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
2328of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
2329base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
2330base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
2331bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
2332large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
2333values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
2334option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
2335
2336@kindex --warn-once
2337@cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
2338@cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
2339@item --warn-once
2340Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
2341which refers to it.
2342
2343@kindex --warn-section-align
2344@cindex warnings, on section alignment
2345@cindex section alignment, warnings on
2346@item --warn-section-align
2347Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
2348alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
2349The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
2350is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
2351the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
2352
8fdd7217
NC
2353@kindex --warn-shared-textrel
2354@item --warn-shared-textrel
ece2d90e 2355Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
8fdd7217 2356
a0c402a5
L
2357@kindex --warn-alternate-em
2358@item --warn-alternate-em
2359Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
2360
560e09e9
NC
2361@kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
2362@item --warn-unresolved-symbols
2363If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
2364@option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
2365This option makes it generate a warning instead.
2366
2367@kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
2368@item --error-unresolved-symbols
2369This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
2370it is reporting unresolved symbols.
2371
252b5132
RH
2372@kindex --whole-archive
2373@cindex including an entire archive
2374@item --whole-archive
2375For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
ff5dcc92 2376@option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
252b5132
RH
2377in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
2378files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
2379library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
2380library. This option may be used more than once.
2381
7ec229ce 2382Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
ff5dcc92
SC
2383about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
2384Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
7ec229ce
DD
2385list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
2386your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
2387
2509a395
SL
2388@kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
2389@item --wrap=@var{symbol}
252b5132
RH
2390Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
2391@var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
2392undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
2393@var{symbol}.
2394
2395This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
2396wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
2397wishes to call the system function, it should call
2398@code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
2399
2400Here is a trivial example:
2401
2402@smallexample
2403void *
cc2f008e 2404__wrap_malloc (size_t c)
252b5132 2405@{
cc2f008e 2406 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
252b5132
RH
2407 return __real_malloc (c);
2408@}
2409@end smallexample
2410
ff5dcc92 2411If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
252b5132
RH
2412all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
2413instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
2414call the real @code{malloc} function.
2415
2416You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
ff5dcc92 2417links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
252b5132
RH
2418you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
2419file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
2420call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
2421
4ea904ed
SH
2422Only undefined references are replaced by the linker. So, translation unit
2423internal references to @var{symbol} are not resolved to
2424@code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. In the next example, the call to @code{f} in
2425@code{g} is not resolved to @code{__wrap_f}.
2426
2427@smallexample
2428int
2429f (void)
2430@{
2431 return 123;
2432@}
2433
2434int
2435g (void)
2436@{
2437 return f();
2438@}
2439@end smallexample
2440
6aa29e7b 2441@kindex --eh-frame-hdr
29063f8b 2442@kindex --no-eh-frame-hdr
6aa29e7b 2443@item --eh-frame-hdr
29063f8b
NC
2444@itemx --no-eh-frame-hdr
2445Request (@option{--eh-frame-hdr}) or suppress
2446(@option{--no-eh-frame-hdr}) the creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr}
2447section and ELF @code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
6aa29e7b 2448
e41b3a13
JJ
2449@kindex --ld-generated-unwind-info
2450@item --no-ld-generated-unwind-info
2451Request creation of @code{.eh_frame} unwind info for linker
2452generated code sections like PLT. This option is on by default
2453if linker generated unwind info is supported.
2454
6c1439be
L
2455@kindex --enable-new-dtags
2456@kindex --disable-new-dtags
2457@item --enable-new-dtags
2458@itemx --disable-new-dtags
2459This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
2460systems may not understand them. If you specify
b1b00fcc
MF
2461@option{--enable-new-dtags}, the new dynamic tags will be created as needed
2462and older dynamic tags will be omitted.
ff5dcc92 2463If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
6c1439be
L
2464created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2465those options are only available for ELF systems.
2466
2d643429 2467@kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
e185dd51 2468@item --hash-size=@var{number}
2d643429
NC
2469Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2470close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2471time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2472increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
2473value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2474
fdc90cb4
JJ
2475@kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2476@item --hash-style=@var{style}
2477Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
2478@code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2479new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2480the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
c8455dc9
NC
2481hash tables. The default depends upon how the linker was configured,
2482but for most Linux based systems it will be @code{both}.
fdc90cb4 2483
0ce398f1
L
2484@kindex --compress-debug-sections=none
2485@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2486@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2487@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
2488@item --compress-debug-sections=none
2489@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2490@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2491@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
9af89fba
NC
2492On ELF platforms, these options control how DWARF debug sections are
2493compressed using zlib.
2494
2495@option{--compress-debug-sections=none} doesn't compress DWARF debug
2496sections. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu} compresses
2497DWARF debug sections and renames them to begin with @samp{.zdebug}
2498instead of @samp{.debug}. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}
2499also compresses DWARF debug sections, but rather than renaming them it
2500sets the SHF_COMPRESSED flag in the sections' headers.
2501
2502The @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib} option is an alias for
2503@option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}.
2504
2505Note that this option overrides any compression in input debug
2506sections, so if a binary is linked with @option{--compress-debug-sections=none}
2507for example, then any compressed debug sections in input files will be
2508uncompressed before they are copied into the output binary.
2509
2510The default compression behaviour varies depending upon the target
2511involved and the configure options used to build the toolchain. The
2512default can be determined by examining the output from the linker's
2513@option{--help} option.
0ce398f1 2514
35835446
JR
2515@kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2516@item --reduce-memory-overheads
2517This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
f2a8f148 2518linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
35835446 2519for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2d643429
NC
2520about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2521
4f9c04f7 2522Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2d643429 25231021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
a85785bc 2524run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2d643429
NC
2525has been used.
2526
2527The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2528enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
35835446 2529
c0065db7
RM
2530@kindex --build-id
2531@kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2532@item --build-id
2533@itemx --build-id=@var{style}
61e2488c 2534Request the creation of a @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section
6033bf41 2535or a @code{.buildid} COFF section. The contents of the note are
61e2488c
JT
2536unique bits identifying this linked file. @var{style} can be
2537@code{uuid} to use 128 random bits, @code{sha1} to use a 160-bit
2538@sc{SHA1} hash on the normative parts of the output contents,
2539@code{md5} to use a 128-bit @sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of
2540the output contents, or @code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit
2541string specified as an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and
2542@code{:} characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style}
2543is omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
24382dca
RM
2544
2545The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2546that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2547unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2548to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2549file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2550string identifying the original linked file does not change.
c0065db7
RM
2551
2552Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2553@code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
252b5132
RH
2554@end table
2555
0285c67d
NC
2556@c man end
2557
36f63dca 2558@subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
252b5132 2559
0285c67d
NC
2560@c man begin OPTIONS
2561
ff5dcc92 2562The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
252b5132
RH
2563the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2564normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2565use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2566@code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2567like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2568symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2569object file).
2570
2571In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
a05a5b64 2572support additional command-line options that are specific to the i386
252b5132
RH
2573PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2574values by either a space or an equals sign.
2575
ff5dcc92 2576@table @gcctabopt
252b5132
RH
2577
2578@kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2579@item --add-stdcall-alias
2580If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2581as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
bb10df36 2582[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2583
2584@kindex --base-file
2585@item --base-file @var{file}
2586Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2587addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2588@file{dlltool}.
bb10df36 2589[This is an i386 PE specific option]
252b5132
RH
2590
2591@kindex --dll
2592@item --dll
2593Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
ff5dcc92 2594@option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
252b5132 2595file.
bb10df36 2596[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2597
88183869
DK
2598@kindex --enable-long-section-names
2599@kindex --disable-long-section-names
2600@item --enable-long-section-names
2601@itemx --disable-long-section-names
56e6cf80 2602The PE variants of the COFF object format add an extension that permits
88183869 2603the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
56e6cf80
NC
2604for COFF. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2605fully-linked executable images do not carry the COFF string table required
88183869
DK
2606to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2607allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2608disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
2609generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2610as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
9d5777a3
RM
2611with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers. However,
2612GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug
3efd345c
DK
2613information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
2614option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
2615section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
2616when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
2617image and not stripping symbols.
88183869
DK
2618[This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2619
252b5132
RH
2620@kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2621@kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2622@item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2623@itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2624If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
36f63dca 2625do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
252b5132
RH
2626only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2627resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2628undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2629@code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2630to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2631warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2632import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
ff5dcc92 2633to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
252b5132 2634feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
ff5dcc92 2635@option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
252b5132 2636mismatches are considered to be errors.
bb10df36 2637[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2638
522f09cd
KT
2639@kindex --leading-underscore
2640@kindex --no-leading-underscore
2641@item --leading-underscore
2642@itemx --no-leading-underscore
2643For most targets default symbol-prefix is an underscore and is defined
2644in target's description. By this option it is possible to
2645disable/enable the default underscore symbol-prefix.
2646
252b5132
RH
2647@cindex DLLs, creating
2648@kindex --export-all-symbols
2649@item --export-all-symbols
2650If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2651be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2652otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2653explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2654attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2655option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
ece2d90e 2656@code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
b044cda1 2657@code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
ece2d90e
NC
2658exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2659re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2660such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2661@code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
b044cda1
CW
2662@code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2663Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2664not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
ece2d90e 2665extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
b044cda1 2666(obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
ece2d90e 2667These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
b044cda1 2668@code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
ece2d90e 2669@code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
b044cda1 2670@code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
ece2d90e 2671@code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
bb10df36 2672[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2673
2674@kindex --exclude-symbols
1d0a3c9c 2675@item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
252b5132
RH
2676Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2677exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
bb10df36 2678[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2679
2927aaca
NC
2680@kindex --exclude-all-symbols
2681@item --exclude-all-symbols
2682Specifies no symbols should be automatically exported.
2683[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2684
252b5132
RH
2685@kindex --file-alignment
2686@item --file-alignment
2687Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2688file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2689512.
bb10df36 2690[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2691
2692@cindex heap size
2693@kindex --heap
2694@item --heap @var{reserve}
2695@itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5 2696Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
fe6d7d6a 2697to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1MB reserved, 4K
252b5132 2698committed.
bb10df36 2699[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2700
2701@cindex image base
2702@kindex --image-base
2703@item --image-base @var{value}
2704Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2705the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2706is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2707your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2708other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2709for dlls.
bb10df36 2710[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2711
2712@kindex --kill-at
2713@item --kill-at
2714If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2715symbols before they are exported.
bb10df36 2716[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2717
26d2d8a2
BF
2718@kindex --large-address-aware
2719@item --large-address-aware
b45619c0 2720If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
26d2d8a2 2721header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
b45619c0 2722greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
26d2d8a2
BF
2723or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2724section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2725[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2726
f69a2f97
NC
2727@kindex --disable-large-address-aware
2728@item --disable-large-address-aware
2729Reverts the effect of a previous @samp{--large-address-aware} option.
2730This is useful if @samp{--large-address-aware} is always set by the compiler
2731driver (e.g. Cygwin gcc) and the executable does not support virtual
2732addresses greater than 2 gigabytes.
2733[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2734
252b5132
RH
2735@kindex --major-image-version
2736@item --major-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2737Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
bb10df36 2738[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2739
2740@kindex --major-os-version
2741@item --major-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2742Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2743[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2744
2745@kindex --major-subsystem-version
2746@item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2747Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2748[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2749
2750@kindex --minor-image-version
2751@item --minor-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2752Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2753[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2754
2755@kindex --minor-os-version
2756@item --minor-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2757Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2758[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2759
2760@kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2761@item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2762Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2763[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2764
2765@cindex DEF files, creating
2766@cindex DLLs, creating
2767@kindex --output-def
2768@item --output-def @var{file}
2769The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2770file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2771(which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2772library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2773automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
bb10df36 2774[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2775
b044cda1 2776@cindex DLLs, creating
b044cda1
CW
2777@kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2778@item --enable-auto-image-base
d0e6d77b
CF
2779@itemx --enable-auto-image-base=@var{value}
2780Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, optionally starting with base
2781@var{value}, unless one is specified using the @code{--image-base} argument.
2782By using a hash generated from the dllname to create unique image bases
2783for each DLL, in-memory collisions and relocations which can delay program
2784execution are avoided.
bb10df36 2785[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2786
2787@kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2788@item --disable-auto-image-base
2789Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2790user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2791default.
bb10df36 2792[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2793
2794@cindex DLLs, linking to
2795@kindex --dll-search-prefix
2796@item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
489d0400 2797When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
ece2d90e 2798search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
560e09e9 2799@code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
b044cda1
CW
2800between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2801uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
ece2d90e 2802@code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
bb10df36 2803[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2804
2805@kindex --enable-auto-import
2806@item --enable-auto-import
ece2d90e 2807Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
317ff008
EB
2808DATA imports from DLLs, thus making it possible to bypass the dllimport
2809mechanism on the user side and to reference unmangled symbol names.
2810[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2811
2812The following remarks pertain to the original implementation of the
2813feature and are obsolete nowadays for Cygwin and MinGW targets.
2814
2815Note: Use of the 'auto-import' extension will cause the text section
2816of the image file to be made writable. This does not conform to the
2817PE-COFF format specification published by Microsoft.
4d8907ac 2818
e2a83dd0
NC
2819Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2820data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2821placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2822around a problem with consts that is described here:
2823http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2824
4d8907ac
DS
2825Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2826see this message:
0d888aac 2827
ece2d90e 2828"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
0d888aac
CW
2829documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2830
ece2d90e
NC
2831This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2832ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
c0065db7
RM
2833allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2834fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2835constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2f8d8971
NC
2836multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2837this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2838of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2839the warning, and exit.
2840
2841There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2842data type of the exported variable:
0d888aac 2843
2fa9fc65
NC
2844One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2845of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
560e09e9 2846this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2fa9fc65 2847
c0065db7
RM
2848A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2849that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2850there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
0d888aac
CW
2851a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2852
2853@example
2854extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2855extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2856 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2857@end example
2858
2859or
2860
2861@example
2862extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2863extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2864 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2865@end example
2866
c0065db7 2867For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2f8d8971 2868is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
0d888aac
CW
2869
2870@example
2871extern struct s extern_struct;
c0065db7 2872extern_struct.field -->
0d888aac
CW
2873 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2874@end example
2875
c406afaf
NC
2876or
2877
2878@example
2879extern long long extern_ll;
2880extern_ll -->
2881 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2882@end example
2883
2fa9fc65 2884A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
c0065db7 2885'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
11e7fd74 2886@code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practice that
0d888aac 2887requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
c0065db7
RM
2888building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2889merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2890between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
0d888aac
CW
2891constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2892
2893Original:
2894@example
2895--foo.h
2896extern int arr[];
2897--foo.c
2898#include "foo.h"
2899void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2900 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2901@}
2902@end example
2903
2904Solution 1:
2905@example
2906--foo.h
2907extern int arr[];
2908--foo.c
2909#include "foo.h"
2910void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2911 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2912 volatile int *parr = arr;
2913 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2914@}
2915@end example
2916
2917Solution 2:
2918@example
2919--foo.h
2920/* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2921#if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2922 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2923#define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2924#else
2925#define FOO_IMPORT
2926#endif
2927extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2928--foo.c
2929#include "foo.h"
2930void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2931 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2932@}
2933@end example
2934
c0065db7 2935A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
0d888aac
CW
2936library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2937for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2938functions).
b044cda1
CW
2939
2940@kindex --disable-auto-import
2941@item --disable-auto-import
c0065db7 2942Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
b044cda1 2943@code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
bb10df36 2944[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2945
2fa9fc65
NC
2946@kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2947@item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2948If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
2949that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
2950a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
c0065db7 2951environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
bb10df36 2952[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65
NC
2953
2954@kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2955@item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
317ff008 2956Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from DLLs.
bb10df36 2957[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65 2958
b044cda1
CW
2959@kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
2960@item --enable-extra-pe-debug
2961Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
bb10df36 2962[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2963
252b5132
RH
2964@kindex --section-alignment
2965@item --section-alignment
2966Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
2967addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
bb10df36 2968[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2969
2970@cindex stack size
2971@kindex --stack
2972@item --stack @var{reserve}
2973@itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5 2974Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
fe6d7d6a 2975to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2MB reserved, 4K
252b5132 2976committed.
bb10df36 2977[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2978
2979@kindex --subsystem
2980@item --subsystem @var{which}
2981@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
2982@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
2983Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
2984legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
33f362e1
NC
2985@code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
2986the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
2987@var{which}.
bb10df36 2988[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2989
2f563b51
DK
2990The following options set flags in the @code{DllCharacteristics} field
2991of the PE file header:
2992[These options are specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2993
2d5c3743
NC
2994@kindex --high-entropy-va
2995@item --high-entropy-va
2996Image is compatible with 64-bit address space layout randomization
2997(ASLR).
2998
2f563b51
DK
2999@kindex --dynamicbase
3000@item --dynamicbase
3001The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
3002randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
3003Vista for i386 PE targets.
3004
3005@kindex --forceinteg
3006@item --forceinteg
3007Code integrity checks are enforced.
3008
3009@kindex --nxcompat
3010@item --nxcompat
3011The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.
3012This feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
3013
3014@kindex --no-isolation
3015@item --no-isolation
3016Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
3017
3018@kindex --no-seh
3019@item --no-seh
3020The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from
3021this image.
3022
3023@kindex --no-bind
3024@item --no-bind
3025Do not bind this image.
3026
3027@kindex --wdmdriver
3028@item --wdmdriver
3029The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
9d5777a3 3030
2f563b51
DK
3031@kindex --tsaware
3032@item --tsaware
3033The image is Terminal Server aware.
3034
0cb112f7
CF
3035@kindex --insert-timestamp
3036@item --insert-timestamp
eeb14e5a
LZ
3037@itemx --no-insert-timestamp
3038Insert a real timestamp into the image. This is the default behaviour
3039as it matches legacy code and it means that the image will work with
3040other, proprietary tools. The problem with this default is that it
56e6cf80 3041will result in slightly different images being produced each time the
eeb14e5a
LZ
3042same sources are linked. The option @option{--no-insert-timestamp}
3043can be used to insert a zero value for the timestamp, this ensuring
56e6cf80 3044that binaries produced from identical sources will compare
eeb14e5a 3045identically.
252b5132
RH
3046@end table
3047
0285c67d
NC
3048@c man end
3049
ac145307
BS
3050@ifset C6X
3051@subsection Options specific to C6X uClinux targets
3052
3053@c man begin OPTIONS
3054
3055The C6X uClinux target uses a binary format called DSBT to support shared
3056libraries. Each shared library in the system needs to have a unique index;
3057all executables use an index of 0.
3058
3059@table @gcctabopt
3060
3061@kindex --dsbt-size
3062@item --dsbt-size @var{size}
56e6cf80 3063This option sets the number of entries in the DSBT of the current executable
ac145307
BS
3064or shared library to @var{size}. The default is to create a table with 64
3065entries.
3066
3067@kindex --dsbt-index
3068@item --dsbt-index @var{index}
3069This option sets the DSBT index of the current executable or shared library
3070to @var{index}. The default is 0, which is appropriate for generating
3071executables. If a shared library is generated with a DSBT index of 0, the
3072@code{R_C6000_DSBT_INDEX} relocs are copied into the output file.
3073
fbd9ad90
PB
3074@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
3075The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent
3076exidx entries in frame unwind info.
3077
ac145307
BS
3078@end table
3079
3080@c man end
3081@end ifset
3082
b8891f8d
AJ
3083@ifset CSKY
3084@subsection Options specific to C-SKY targets
3085
3086@c man begin OPTIONS
3087
3088@table @gcctabopt
3089
3090@kindex --branch-stub on C-SKY
3091@item --branch-stub
3092This option enables linker branch relaxation by inserting branch stub
3093sections when needed to extend the range of branches. This option is
3094usually not required since C-SKY supports branch and call instructions that
3095can access the full memory range and branch relaxation is normally handled by
3096the compiler or assembler.
3097
3098@kindex --stub-group-size on C-SKY
3099@item --stub-group-size=@var{N}
3100This option allows finer control of linker branch stub creation.
3101It sets the maximum size of a group of input sections that can
3102be handled by one stub section. A negative value of @var{N} locates
3103stub sections after their branches, while a positive value allows stub
3104sections to appear either before or after the branches. Values of
3105@samp{1} or @samp{-1} indicate that the
3106linker should choose suitable defaults.
3107
3108@end table
3109
3110@c man end
3111@end ifset
3112
93fd0973
SC
3113@ifset M68HC11
3114@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
3115
3116@c man begin OPTIONS
3117
3118The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
3119memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
3120
3121@table @gcctabopt
3122
3123@kindex --no-trampoline
3124@item --no-trampoline
3125This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
3126is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
3127instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
3128
3129@kindex --bank-window
3130@item --bank-window @var{name}
3131This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
3132the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
3133The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
3134paging and addresses within the memory window.
3135
3136@end table
3137
3138@c man end
3139@end ifset
3140
7fb9f789
NC
3141@ifset M68K
3142@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
3143
3144@c man begin OPTIONS
3145
3146The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
3147when linking for 68K targets.
3148
3149@table @gcctabopt
3150
3151@kindex --got
3152@item --got=@var{type}
3153This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
3154@var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
3155@samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
3156Info entry for @file{ld}.
3157
3158@end table
3159
3160@c man end
3161@end ifset
3162
833794fc
MR
3163@ifset MIPS
3164@subsection Options specific to MIPS targets
3165
3166@c man begin OPTIONS
3167
3168The following options are supported to control microMIPS instruction
8b10b0b3
MR
3169generation and branch relocation checks for ISA mode transitions when
3170linking for MIPS targets.
833794fc
MR
3171
3172@table @gcctabopt
3173
3174@kindex --insn32
3175@item --insn32
3176@kindex --no-insn32
3177@itemx --no-insn32
3178These options control the choice of microMIPS instructions used in code
3179generated by the linker, such as that in the PLT or lazy binding stubs,
3180or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is used, then the linker only uses
318132-bit instruction encodings. By default or if @samp{--no-insn32} is
3182used, all instruction encodings are used, including 16-bit ones where
3183possible.
3184
8b10b0b3
MR
3185@kindex --ignore-branch-isa
3186@item --ignore-branch-isa
3187@kindex --no-ignore-branch-isa
3188@itemx --no-ignore-branch-isa
3189These options control branch relocation checks for invalid ISA mode
3190transitions. If @samp{--ignore-branch-isa} is used, then the linker
3191accepts any branch relocations and any ISA mode transition required
3192is lost in relocation calculation, except for some cases of @code{BAL}
3193instructions which meet relaxation conditions and are converted to
3194equivalent @code{JALX} instructions as the associated relocation is
3195calculated. By default or if @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} is used
3196a check is made causing the loss of an ISA mode transition to produce
3197an error.
3198
3734320d
MF
3199@kindex --compact-branches
3200@item --compact-branches
3201@kindex --no-compact-branches
3202@item --compact-branches
3203These options control the generation of compact instructions by the linker
3204in the PLT entries for MIPS R6.
3205
833794fc
MR
3206@end table
3207
3208@c man end
3209@end ifset
3210
252b5132
RH
3211@ifset UsesEnvVars
3212@node Environment
3213@section Environment Variables
3214
0285c67d
NC
3215@c man begin ENVIRONMENT
3216
560e09e9 3217You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
36f63dca
NC
3218@ifclear SingleFormat
3219@code{GNUTARGET},
3220@end ifclear
3221@code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
252b5132 3222
36f63dca 3223@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
3224@kindex GNUTARGET
3225@cindex default input format
3226@code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
3227use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
3228of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
ff5dcc92 3229@code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
252b5132
RH
3230of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
3231attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
3232this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
3233there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
3234object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
3235BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
3236in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
36f63dca 3237@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
3238
3239@kindex LDEMULATION
3240@cindex default emulation
3241@cindex emulation, default
3242@code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
3243@samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
3244behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
3245available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
3246the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
3247variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
3248linker was configured.
252b5132
RH
3249
3250@kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
3251@cindex demangling, default
3252Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
3253@code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
3254default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
3255a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
3256may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
3257options.
3258
0285c67d
NC
3259@c man end
3260@end ifset
3261
252b5132
RH
3262@node Scripts
3263@chapter Linker Scripts
3264
3265@cindex scripts
3266@cindex linker scripts
3267@cindex command files
3268Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
3269written in the linker command language.
3270
3271The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
3272the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
3273the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
3274more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
3275direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
3276described below.
3277
3278The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
3279yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
a05a5b64
TP
3280linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command-line option
3281to display the default linker script. Certain command-line options,
252b5132
RH
3282such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
3283
3284You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
3285line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
3286default linker script.
3287
3288You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
3289to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
3290Linker Scripts}.
3291
3292@menu
3293* Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
3294* Script Format:: Linker Script Format
3295* Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
3296* Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
3297* Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
3298* SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
3299* MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
3300* PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
3301* VERSION:: VERSION Command
3302* Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
3303* Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
3304@end menu
3305
3306@node Basic Script Concepts
3307@section Basic Linker Script Concepts
3308@cindex linker script concepts
3309We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
3310describe the linker script language.
3311
3312The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
3313file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
3314@dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
3315The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
3316purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
3317among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
3318section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
3319in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
3320
3321Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
3322also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
56dd11f0 3323contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which means that
252b5132
RH
3324the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
3325A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
3326area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
3327loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
3328which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
3329of debugging information.
3330
3331Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
3332first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
3333the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
3334@dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
3335section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
3336same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
3337is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
3338(this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
3339based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
3340RAM address would be the VMA.
3341
3342You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
3343program with the @samp{-h} option.
3344
3345Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
3346@dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
3347has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
3348information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
3349will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
3350static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
3351referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
3352
3353You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
3354program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
3355option.
3356
3357@node Script Format
3358@section Linker Script Format
3359@cindex linker script format
3360Linker scripts are text files.
3361
3362You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
3363either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
3364symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
3365generally ignored.
3366
3367Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
3368If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
3369otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
3370double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
3371file name.
3372
3373You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
3374@samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
3375to whitespace.
3376
3377@node Simple Example
3378@section Simple Linker Script Example
3379@cindex linker script example
3380@cindex example of linker script
3381Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
3382
3383The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
3384@samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
3385memory layout of the output file.
3386
3387The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
3388describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
3389code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
3390@samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
3391Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
3392your input files.
3393
3394For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
33950x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
3396linker script which will do that:
3397@smallexample
3398SECTIONS
3399@{
3400 . = 0x10000;
3401 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
3402 . = 0x8000000;
3403 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3404 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
3405@}
3406@end smallexample
3407
3408You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
3409followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
3410descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
3411
252b5132
RH
3412The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
3413sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
3414counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
3415other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
3416current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
3417incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
3418@samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
3419
3420The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
3421required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
3422after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
3423which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
3424wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
3425means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
3426
3427Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
3428@samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
3429@samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
3430
3431The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
3432the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
3433at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
3434output section, the value of the location counter will be
3435@samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
3436effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
58434bc1 3437immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
252b5132
RH
3438
3439The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
3440alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
3441example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
3442sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
3443may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
3444sections.
3445
3446That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
3447
3448@node Simple Commands
3449@section Simple Linker Script Commands
3450@cindex linker script simple commands
3451In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
3452
3453@menu
3454* Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
3455* File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
3456@ifclear SingleFormat
3457* Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
3458@end ifclear
3459
4a93e180 3460* REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
252b5132
RH
3461* Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
3462@end menu
3463
3464@node Entry Point
36f63dca 3465@subsection Setting the Entry Point
252b5132
RH
3466@kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3467@cindex start of execution
3468@cindex first instruction
3469@cindex entry point
3470The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
3471point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
3472entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
3473@smallexample
3474ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3475@end smallexample
3476
3477There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
3478entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
3479stopping when one of them succeeds:
3480@itemize @bullet
a1ab1d2a 3481@item
252b5132 3482the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
a1ab1d2a 3483@item
252b5132 3484the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
a1ab1d2a 3485@item
a094d01f 3486the value of a target-specific symbol, if it is defined; For many
8a758655 3487targets this is @code{start}, but PE- and BeOS-based systems for example
3ab904c4 3488check a list of possible entry symbols, matching the first one found.
a1ab1d2a 3489@item
252b5132 3490the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
a1ab1d2a 3491@item
252b5132
RH
3492The address @code{0}.
3493@end itemize
3494
3495@node File Commands
36f63dca 3496@subsection Commands Dealing with Files
252b5132
RH
3497@cindex linker script file commands
3498Several linker script commands deal with files.
3499
3500@table @code
3501@item INCLUDE @var{filename}
3502@kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
3503@cindex including a linker script
3504Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
3505be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
ff5dcc92 3506with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
252b5132
RH
350710 levels deep.
3508
4006703d
NS
3509You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
3510@code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
3511
252b5132
RH
3512@item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3513@itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3514@kindex INPUT(@var{files})
3515@cindex input files in linker scripts
3516@cindex input object files in linker scripts
3517@cindex linker script input object files
3518The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
3519in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
3520
3521For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
3522a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
3523then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
3524
3525In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
3526script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
3527
e3f2db7f
AO
3528In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
3529with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
3530located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
3531for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. Otherwise, the linker will try to
3532open the file in the current directory. If it is not found, the
cad60a33
HPN
3533linker will search through the archive library search path.
3534The @dfn{sysroot prefix} can also be forced by specifying @code{=}
3aa2d05a
NC
3535as the first character in the filename path, or prefixing the filename
3536path with @code{$SYSROOT}. See also the description of @samp{-L} in
a05a5b64 3537@ref{Options,,Command-line Options}.
252b5132 3538
ff5dcc92 3539If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
a05a5b64 3540name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command-line argument
252b5132
RH
3541@samp{-l}.
3542
3543When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
3544files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
3545script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
3546
3547@item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3548@itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3549@kindex GROUP(@var{files})
3550@cindex grouping input files
3551The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
3552files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
3553new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
a05a5b64 3554in @ref{Options,,Command-line Options}.
252b5132 3555
b717d30e
JJ
3556@item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3557@itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3558@kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
3559This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
3560commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
3561as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
3562with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
3563when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
3564@option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
3565and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
3566setting afterwards.
3567
252b5132
RH
3568@item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3569@kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
b45619c0 3570@cindex output file name in linker script
252b5132
RH
3571The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
3572@code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
3573@samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
a05a5b64 3574Line Options}). If both are used, the command-line option takes
252b5132
RH
3575precedence.
3576
3577You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
3578output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
3579
3580@item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3581@kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3582@cindex library search path in linker script
3583@cindex archive search path in linker script
3584@cindex search path in linker script
3585The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
ff5dcc92 3586@command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
252b5132 3587@code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
a05a5b64 3588on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command-line Options}). If both
252b5132 3589are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
a05a5b64 3590the command-line option are searched first.
252b5132
RH
3591
3592@item STARTUP(@var{filename})
3593@kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
3594@cindex first input file
3595The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
3596that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
3597though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
3598when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
3599first file.
3600@end table
3601
3602@ifclear SingleFormat
3603@node Format Commands
36f63dca 3604@subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
252b5132
RH
3605A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
3606
3607@table @code
3608@item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3609@itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
3610@kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3611@cindex output file format in linker script
3612The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
3613output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
024531e2 3614exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
a05a5b64 3615(@pxref{Options,,Command-line Options}). If both are used, the command
252b5132
RH
3616line option takes precedence.
3617
3618You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
a05a5b64 3619formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command-line options.
252b5132
RH
3620This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
3621desired endianness.
3622
3623If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
3624will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
3625output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
3626used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
3627
3628For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
3629command:
3630@smallexample
3631OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
3632@end smallexample
3633This says that the default format for the output file is
a05a5b64 3634@samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command-line
252b5132
RH
3635option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
3636format.
3637
3638@item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3639@kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3640@cindex input file format in linker script
3641The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
3642files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
3643This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
a05a5b64 3644(@pxref{Options,,Command-line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
252b5132
RH
3645is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
3646command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
3647@end table
3648@end ifclear
3649
4a93e180
NC
3650@node REGION_ALIAS
3651@subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
3652@kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3653@cindex region alias
3654@cindex region names
3655
3656Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
3657@ref{MEMORY} command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
3658
3659@smallexample
3660REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3661@end smallexample
3662
3663The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
3664memory region @var{region}. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
3665to memory regions. An example follows.
3666
3667Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
3668memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
3669that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have a read-only,
3670non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
3671access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
3672read-only data access and no code execution capability. We have four output
3673sections:
3674
3675@itemize @bullet
3676@item
3677@code{.text} program code;
3678@item
3679@code{.rodata} read-only data;
3680@item
3681@code{.data} read-write initialized data;
3682@item
3683@code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
3684@end itemize
3685
3686The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
3687part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
3688output sections to the memory regions available on the system. Our embedded
3689systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
3690@code{C}:
3691@multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
3692@item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
9d5777a3 3693@item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
4a93e180
NC
3694@item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
3695@item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
3696@item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
3697@end multitable
3698The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
3699loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively. Please note that
3700the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
3701the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
3702
3703The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. It
3704includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
3705memory layout:
3706@smallexample
3707INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
3708
3709SECTIONS
3710 @{
3711 .text :
3712 @{
3713 *(.text)
3714 @} > REGION_TEXT
3715 .rodata :
3716 @{
3717 *(.rodata)
3718 rodata_end = .;
3719 @} > REGION_RODATA
3720 .data : AT (rodata_end)
3721 @{
3722 data_start = .;
3723 *(.data)
3724 @} > REGION_DATA
3725 data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
3726 data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
3727 .bss :
3728 @{
3729 *(.bss)
3730 @} > REGION_BSS
3731 @}
3732@end smallexample
3733
3734Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
3735regions and alias names. The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
3736variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
3737@table @code
3738@item A
3739Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
3740@smallexample
3741MEMORY
3742 @{
3743 RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
3744 @}
3745
3746REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
3747REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
3748REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3749REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3750@end smallexample
3751@item B
3752Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}. Read-write data goes
3753into the @code{RAM}. An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
3754@code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
3755@smallexample
3756MEMORY
3757 @{
3758 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
3759 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3760 @}
3761
3762REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3763REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
3764REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3765REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3766@end smallexample
3767@item C
3768Program code goes into the @code{ROM}. Read-only data goes into the
3769@code{ROM2}. Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}. An image of the
3770initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
3771system start into the @code{RAM}.
3772@smallexample
3773MEMORY
3774 @{
3775 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
3776 ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3777 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
3778 @}
3779
3780REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3781REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
3782REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3783REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3784@end smallexample
3785@end table
3786
3787It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
3788@code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
3789necessary:
3790@smallexample
3791#include <string.h>
3792
3793extern char data_start [];
3794extern char data_size [];
3795extern char data_load_start [];
3796
3797void copy_data(void)
3798@{
3799 if (data_start != data_load_start)
3800 @{
3801 memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
3802 @}
3803@}
3804@end smallexample
3805
252b5132 3806@node Miscellaneous Commands
36f63dca 3807@subsection Other Linker Script Commands
252b5132
RH
3808There are a few other linker scripts commands.
3809
3810@table @code
3811@item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
3812@kindex ASSERT
3813@cindex assertion in linker script
3814Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
3815with an error code, and print @var{message}.
3816
fd1c4238
NC
3817Note that assertions are checked before the final stages of linking
3818take place. This means that expressions involving symbols PROVIDEd
3819inside section definitions will fail if the user has not set values
3820for those symbols. The only exception to this rule is PROVIDEd
3821symbols that just reference dot. Thus an assertion like this:
3822
3823@smallexample
3824 .stack :
3825 @{
3826 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3827 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3828 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3829 @}
3830@end smallexample
3831
3832will fail if @code{__stack_size} is not defined elsewhere. Symbols
3833PROVIDEd outside of section definitions are evaluated earlier, so they
3834can be used inside ASSERTions. Thus:
3835
3836@smallexample
3837 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3838 .stack :
3839 @{
3840 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3841 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3842 @}
3843@end smallexample
3844
3845will work.
3846
252b5132
RH
3847@item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
3848@kindex EXTERN
3849@cindex undefined symbol in linker script
3850Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
3851symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
3852modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
3853each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
3854command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
3855
3856@item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3857@kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3858@cindex common allocation in linker script
3859This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
ff5dcc92 3860to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
252b5132
RH
3861output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
3862
4818e05f
AM
3863@item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3864@kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3865@cindex common allocation in linker script
3866This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
3867command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
3868to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
3869
7bdf4127
AB
3870@item FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION
3871@kindex FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION
3872@cindex group allocation in linker script
3873@cindex section groups
3874@cindex COMDAT
3875This command has the same effect as the
3876@samp{--force-group-allocation} command-line option: to make
3877@command{ld} place section group members like normal input sections,
3878and to delete the section groups even if a relocatable output file is
3879specified (@samp{-r}).
3880
53d25da6
AM
3881@item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
3882@kindex INSERT
3883@cindex insert user script into default script
3884This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
3885augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
3886inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
3887@var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
3888default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
3889sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
3890linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
3891insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
3892linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
3893default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
3894of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
3895to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
3896is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
3897
3898@smallexample
3899SECTIONS
3900@{
3901 OVERLAY :
3902 @{
3903 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
3904 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
3905 @}
3906@}
3907INSERT AFTER .text;
3908@end smallexample
3909
252b5132
RH
3910@item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
3911@kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
3912@cindex cross references
ff5dcc92 3913This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
252b5132
RH
3914references among certain output sections.
3915
3916In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
3917using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
3918will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
3919errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
3920a function defined in the other section.
3921
3922The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
ff5dcc92 3923@command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
252b5132
RH
3924an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
3925@code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
3926names.
3927
cdf96953
MF
3928@item NOCROSSREFS_TO(@var{tosection} @var{fromsection} @dots{})
3929@kindex NOCROSSREFS_TO(@var{tosection} @var{fromsections})
3930@cindex cross references
3931This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
3932references to one section from a list of other sections.
3933
3934The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command is useful when ensuring that two or more
3935output sections are entirely independent but there are situations where
3936a one-way dependency is needed. For example, in a multi-core application
3937there may be shared code that can be called from each core but for safety
3938must never call back.
3939
3940The @code{NOCROSSREFS_TO} command takes a list of output section names.
3941The first section can not be referenced from any of the other sections.
3942If @command{ld} detects any references to the first section from any of
3943the other sections, it reports an error and returns a non-zero exit
3944status. Note that the @code{NOCROSSREFS_TO} command uses output section
3945names, not input section names.
3946
252b5132
RH
3947@ifclear SingleFormat
3948@item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3949@kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3950@cindex machine architecture
3951@cindex architecture
3952Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
3953of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
3954architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
3955the @samp{-f} option.
3956@end ifclear
01554a74
AM
3957
3958@item LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3959@kindex LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3960This command may be used to modify @command{ld} behavior. If
3961@var{string} is @code{"SANE_EXPR"} then absolute symbols and numbers
3962in a script are simply treated as numbers everywhere.
3963@xref{Expression Section}.
252b5132
RH
3964@end table
3965
3966@node Assignments
3967@section Assigning Values to Symbols
3968@cindex assignment in scripts
3969@cindex symbol definition, scripts
3970@cindex variables, defining
3971You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
73ae6183 3972the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
252b5132
RH
3973
3974@menu
3975* Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
eb8476a6 3976* HIDDEN:: HIDDEN
252b5132 3977* PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
7af8e998 3978* PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
73ae6183 3979* Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
252b5132
RH
3980@end menu
3981
3982@node Simple Assignments
3983@subsection Simple Assignments
3984
3985You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
3986
3987@table @code
3988@item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
3989@itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
3990@itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
3991@itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
3992@itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
3993@itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
3994@itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
3995@itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
3996@itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
3997@end table
3998
3999The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
4000@var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
4001defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
4002
4003The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
b5666f2f 4004may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
252b5132
RH
4005
4006The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
4007
4008Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
4009
4010You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
4011statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
4012section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
4013
4014The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
4015expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
4016
4017Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
4018assignments may be used:
4019
4020@smallexample
4021floating_point = 0;
4022SECTIONS
4023@{
4024 .text :
4025 @{
4026 *(.text)
4027 _etext = .;
4028 @}
156e34dd 4029 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
252b5132
RH
4030 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4031@}
4032@end smallexample
4033@noindent
4034In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
4035zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
4036the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
4037defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
4038upward to a 4 byte boundary.
4039
eb8476a6
MR
4040@node HIDDEN
4041@subsection HIDDEN
4042@cindex HIDDEN
4043For ELF targeted ports, define a symbol that will be hidden and won't be
4044exported. The syntax is @code{HIDDEN(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
4045
4046Here is the example from @ref{Simple Assignments}, rewritten to use
4047@code{HIDDEN}:
4048
4049@smallexample
4050HIDDEN(floating_point = 0);
4051SECTIONS
4052@{
4053 .text :
4054 @{
4055 *(.text)
4056 HIDDEN(_etext = .);
4057 @}
4058 HIDDEN(_bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3);
4059 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4060@}
4061@end smallexample
4062@noindent
4063In this case none of the three symbols will be visible outside this module.
4064
252b5132
RH
4065@node PROVIDE
4066@subsection PROVIDE
4067@cindex PROVIDE
4068In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
4069only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
4070the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
4071@samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
4072@samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
4073@code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
4074@samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
4075@code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
4076
4077Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
4078@smallexample
4079SECTIONS
4080@{
4081 .text :
4082 @{
4083 *(.text)
4084 _etext = .;
4085 PROVIDE(etext = .);
4086 @}
4087@}
4088@end smallexample
4089
4090In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
4091underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
4092the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
4093underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
4094If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
4095linker will use the definition in the linker script.
4096
b0daac83
NC
4097Note - the @code{PROVIDE} directive considers a common symbol to be
4098defined, even though such a symbol could be combined with the symbol
4099that the @code{PROVIDE} would create. This is particularly important
4100when considering constructor and destructor list symbols such as
4101@samp{__CTOR_LIST__} as these are often defined as common symbols.
4102
7af8e998
L
4103@node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
4104@subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
4105@cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
4106Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
4107hidden and won't be exported.
4108
73ae6183
NC
4109@node Source Code Reference
4110@subsection Source Code Reference
4111
4112Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
4113intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
4114a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
4115symbol that does not have a value.
4116
4117Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
4118transform names in the source code into different names when they are
4119stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
4120prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
4121mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
4122of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
4123variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
4124linker script variable might be referred to as:
4125
4126@smallexample
4127 extern int foo;
4128@end smallexample
4129
4130But in the linker script it might be defined as:
4131
4132@smallexample
4133 _foo = 1000;
4134@end smallexample
4135
4136In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
4137transformation has taken place.
4138
4139When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
4140things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
4141in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
4142second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
4143table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
4144contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
4145value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
4146
4147@smallexample
4148 int foo = 1000;
4149@end smallexample
4150
10bf6894 4151creates an entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
73ae6183
NC
4152holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
4153number 1000 is initially stored.
4154
4155When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
4156first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
4157memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
4158So:
4159
4160@smallexample
4161 foo = 1;
4162@end smallexample
4163
4164looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
4165associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
4166address. Whereas:
4167
4168@smallexample
4169 int * a = & foo;
4170@end smallexample
4171
10bf6894 4172looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets its address
73ae6183
NC
4173and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
4174the variable @samp{a}.
4175
4176Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
4177the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
4178an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
4179
4180@smallexample
4181 foo = 1000;
4182@end smallexample
4183
4184creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
4185the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
4186address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
4187linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
4188access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
4189
4190Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
4191you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
4192use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
4193section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
4194linker script contains these declarations:
4195
4196@smallexample
4197@group
4198 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
a5e406b5 4199 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM);
73ae6183
NC
4200 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
4201@end group
4202@end smallexample
4203
4204Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
4205
4206@smallexample
4207@group
4208 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
c0065db7 4209
73ae6183
NC
4210 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
4211@end group
4212@end smallexample
4213
4214Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
5707d2ad
NC
4215Alternatively the symbols can be treated as the names of vectors or
4216arrays and then the code will again work as expected:
4217
4218@smallexample
4219@group
4220 extern char start_of_ROM[], end_of_ROM[], start_of_FLASH[];
4221
4222 memcpy (start_of_FLASH, start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM - start_of_ROM);
4223@end group
4224@end smallexample
4225
4226Note how using this method does not require the use of @samp{&}
4227operators.
73ae6183 4228
252b5132 4229@node SECTIONS
36f63dca 4230@section SECTIONS Command
252b5132
RH
4231@kindex SECTIONS
4232The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
4233into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
4234
4235The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
4236@smallexample
4237SECTIONS
4238@{
4239 @var{sections-command}
4240 @var{sections-command}
4241 @dots{}
4242@}
4243@end smallexample
4244
4245Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
4246
4247@itemize @bullet
4248@item
4249an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
4250@item
4251a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
4252@item
4253an output section description
4254@item
4255an overlay description
4256@end itemize
4257
4258The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
4259@code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
4260those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
4261understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
4262the layout of the output file.
4263
4264Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
4265below.
4266
4267If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
4268linker will place each input section into an identically named output
4269section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
4270input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
4271example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
4272in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
4273
4274@menu
4275* Output Section Description:: Output section description
4276* Output Section Name:: Output section name
4277* Output Section Address:: Output section address
4278* Input Section:: Input section description
4279* Output Section Data:: Output section data
4280* Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
4281* Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
4282* Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
4283* Overlay Description:: Overlay description
4284@end menu
4285
4286@node Output Section Description
36f63dca 4287@subsection Output Section Description
252b5132
RH
4288The full description of an output section looks like this:
4289@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 4290@group
7e7d5768 4291@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759 4292 [AT(@var{lma})]
1eec346e 4293 [ALIGN(@var{section_align}) | ALIGN_WITH_INPUT]
0c71d759
NC
4294 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4295 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
4296 @{
4297 @var{output-section-command}
4298 @var{output-section-command}
4299 @dots{}
abc9061b 4300 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}] [,]
252b5132
RH
4301@end group
4302@end smallexample
4303
4304Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
4305
4306The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
4307name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
abc9061b
CC
4308The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fillexp} is used and
4309the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
252b5132
RH
4310The line breaks and other white space are optional.
4311
4312Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
4313
4314@itemize @bullet
4315@item
4316a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
4317@item
4318an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
4319@item
4320data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
4321@item
4322a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
4323@end itemize
4324
4325@node Output Section Name
36f63dca 4326@subsection Output Section Name
252b5132
RH
4327@cindex name, section
4328@cindex section name
4329The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
4330meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
4331support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
4332must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
4333example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
4334output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
4335names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
4336quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
4337characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
4338commas must be quoted.
4339
4340The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
4341Discarding}.
4342
4343@node Output Section Address
2a16d82a 4344@subsection Output Section Address
252b5132
RH
4345@cindex address, section
4346@cindex section address
4347The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
ea5cae92
NC
4348address) of the output section. This address is optional, but if it
4349is provided then the output address will be set exactly as specified.
4350
4351If the output address is not specified then one will be chosen for the
4352section, based on the heuristic below. This address will be adjusted
4353to fit the alignment requirement of the output section. The
4354alignment requirement is the strictest alignment of any input section
4355contained within the output section.
4356
4357The output section address heuristic is as follows:
4358
4359@itemize @bullet
4360@item
4361If an output memory @var{region} is set for the section then it
4362is added to this region and its address will be the next free address
4363in that region.
4364
4365@item
4366If the MEMORY command has been used to create a list of memory
4367regions then the first region which has attributes compatible with the
4368section is selected to contain it. The section's output address will
4369be the next free address in that region; @ref{MEMORY}.
4370
4371@item
4372If no memory regions were specified, or none match the section then
4373the output address will be based on the current value of the location
4374counter.
4375@end itemize
4376
4377@noindent
4378For example:
4379
252b5132
RH
4380@smallexample
4381.text . : @{ *(.text) @}
4382@end smallexample
ea5cae92 4383
252b5132
RH
4384@noindent
4385and
ea5cae92 4386
252b5132
RH
4387@smallexample
4388.text : @{ *(.text) @}
4389@end smallexample
ea5cae92 4390
252b5132
RH
4391@noindent
4392are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
4393@samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
4394counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
ea5cae92
NC
4395counter aligned to the strictest alignment of any of the @samp{.text}
4396input sections.
252b5132
RH
4397
4398The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
4399For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
4400so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
4401do something like this:
4402@smallexample
4403.text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
4404@end smallexample
4405@noindent
4406This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
4407aligned upward to the specified value.
4408
4409Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
6ce340f1
NC
4410location counter, provided that the section is non-empty. (Empty
4411sections are ignored).
252b5132
RH
4412
4413@node Input Section
36f63dca 4414@subsection Input Section Description
252b5132
RH
4415@cindex input sections
4416@cindex mapping input sections to output sections
4417The most common output section command is an input section description.
4418
4419The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
4420You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
4421in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
4422map the input files into your memory layout.
4423
4424@menu
4425* Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
4426* Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
4427* Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
4428* Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
4429* Input Section Example:: Input section example
4430@end menu
4431
4432@node Input Section Basics
36f63dca 4433@subsubsection Input Section Basics
252b5132
RH
4434@cindex input section basics
4435An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
4436by a list of section names in parentheses.
4437
4438The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
4439describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
4440
4441The most common input section description is to include all input
4442sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
4443include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
4444@smallexample
4445*(.text)
4446@end smallexample
4447@noindent
18625d54 4448Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
8f1732fc 4449@cindex EXCLUDE_FILE
18625d54
CM
4450of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
4451match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
4452example:
252b5132 4453@smallexample
8f1732fc
AB
4454EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) *(.ctors)
4455@end smallexample
4456@noindent
4457will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o}
4458and @file{otherfile.o} to be included. The EXCLUDE_FILE can also be
4459placed inside the section list, for example:
4460@smallexample
b4346c09 4461*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
252b5132 4462@end smallexample
8f1732fc
AB
4463@noindent
4464The result of this is identically to the previous example. Supporting
4465two syntaxes for EXCLUDE_FILE is useful if the section list contains
4466more than one section, as described below.
252b5132
RH
4467
4468There are two ways to include more than one section:
4469@smallexample
4470*(.text .rdata)
4471*(.text) *(.rdata)
4472@end smallexample
4473@noindent
4474The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
4475@samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
b6bf44ba
AM
4476first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
4477they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
252b5132
RH
4478@samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
4479@samp{.rdata} input sections.
4480
8f1732fc
AB
4481When using EXCLUDE_FILE with more than one section, if the exclusion
4482is within the section list then the exclusion only applies to the
4483immediately following section, for example:
a5bf7d4f
AB
4484@smallexample
4485*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .text .rdata)
4486@end smallexample
4487@noindent
4488will cause all @samp{.text} sections from all files except
4489@file{somefile.o} to be included, while all @samp{.rdata} sections
4490from all files, including @file{somefile.o}, will be included. To
4491exclude the @samp{.rdata} sections from @file{somefile.o} the example
8f1732fc 4492could be modified to:
a5bf7d4f
AB
4493@smallexample
4494*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .text EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .rdata)
4495@end smallexample
8f1732fc
AB
4496@noindent
4497Alternatively, placing the EXCLUDE_FILE outside of the section list,
4498before the input file selection, will cause the exclusion to apply for
4499all sections. Thus the previous example can be rewritten as:
4500@smallexample
4501EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) *(.text .rdata)
4502@end smallexample
a5bf7d4f 4503
252b5132
RH
4504You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
4505You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
4506needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
4507@smallexample
4508data.o(.data)
4509@end smallexample
4510
ae17ab41
CM
4511To refine the sections that are included based on the section flags
4512of an input section, INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS may be used.
4513
4514Here is a simple example for using Section header flags for ELF sections:
4515
4516@smallexample
4517@group
4518SECTIONS @{
4519 .text : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (SHF_MERGE & SHF_STRINGS) *(.text) @}
4520 .text2 : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (!SHF_WRITE) *(.text) @}
4521@}
4522@end group
4523@end smallexample
4524
4525In this example, the output section @samp{.text} will be comprised of any
4526input section matching the name *(.text) whose section header flags
4527@code{SHF_MERGE} and @code{SHF_STRINGS} are set. The output section
4528@samp{.text2} will be comprised of any input section matching the name *(.text)
4529whose section header flag @code{SHF_WRITE} is clear.
4530
967928e9
AM
4531You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
4532matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
4533with no whitespace around the colon.
4534
4535@table @samp
4536@item archive:file
4537matches file within archive
4538@item archive:
4539matches the whole archive
4540@item :file
4541matches file but not one in an archive
4542@end table
4543
4544Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
4545wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
4546single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
4547@samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
4548within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
4549also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
4550other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
4551from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
4552command.
4553
252b5132
RH
4554If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
4555the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
4556commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
4557@smallexample
4558data.o
4559@end smallexample
4560
967928e9
AM
4561When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
4562and does not contain any wild card
252b5132
RH
4563characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
4564name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
4565did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
4566though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
4567@code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
4568the archive search path.
4569
4570@node Input Section Wildcards
36f63dca 4571@subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
252b5132
RH
4572@cindex input section wildcards
4573@cindex wildcard file name patterns
4574@cindex file name wildcard patterns
4575@cindex section name wildcard patterns
4576In an input section description, either the file name or the section
4577name or both may be wildcard patterns.
4578
4579The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
4580pattern for the file name.
4581
4582The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
4583
4584@table @samp
4585@item *
4586matches any number of characters
4587@item ?
4588matches any single character
4589@item [@var{chars}]
4590matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
4591character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
4592@samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
4593@item \
4594quotes the following character
4595@end table
4596
4597When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
4598will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
4599Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
4600exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
4601@samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
4602a @samp{/} character.
4603
4604File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
4605specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
4606does not search directories to expand wildcards.
4607
4608If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
4609appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
4610will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
4611sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
4612@file{data.o} rule will not be used:
4613@smallexample
4614.data : @{ *(.data) @}
4615.data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
4616@end smallexample
4617
bcaa7b3e 4618@cindex SORT_BY_NAME
252b5132
RH
4619Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
4620in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
bcaa7b3e
L
4621this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
4622pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
4623@code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
252b5132
RH
4624into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
4625
bcaa7b3e 4626@cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
9a24a276
AM
4627@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4628@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into descending order of
4629alignment before placing them in the output file. Placing larger
4630alignments before smaller alignments can reduce the amount of padding
4631needed.
bcaa7b3e 4632
02ecc8e9 4633@cindex SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY
9a24a276
AM
4634@code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} is also similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4635@code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} will sort sections into ascending
4636numerical order of the GCC init_priority attribute encoded in the
4637section name before placing them in the output file. In
4638@code{.init_array.NNNNN} and @code{.fini_array.NNNNN}, @code{NNNNN} is
4639the init_priority. In @code{.ctors.NNNNN} and @code{.dtors.NNNNN},
4640@code{NNNNN} is 65535 minus the init_priority.
02ecc8e9 4641
bcaa7b3e
L
4642@cindex SORT
4643@code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4644
4645When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
4646can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
4647
4648@enumerate
4649@item
4650@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
1ae5c3ae 4651It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if two
bcaa7b3e
L
4652sections have the same name.
4653@item
4654@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
1ae5c3ae 4655It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if two
bcaa7b3e
L
4656sections have the same alignment.
4657@item
c0065db7 4658@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
bcaa7b3e
L
4659treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
4660@item
4661@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
4662is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
4663@item
4664All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
4665@end enumerate
4666
a05a5b64 4667When both command-line section sorting option and linker script
bcaa7b3e 4668section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
a05a5b64 4669takes precedence over the command-line option.
bcaa7b3e
L
4670
4671If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
a05a5b64 4672command-line option will make the section sorting command to be
bcaa7b3e
L
4673treated as nested sorting command.
4674
4675@enumerate
4676@item
4677@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
4678@option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
4679@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4680@item
4681@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
4682@option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
4683@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4684@end enumerate
4685
4686If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
a05a5b64 4687command-line option will be ignored.
bcaa7b3e 4688
eda680f8 4689@cindex SORT_NONE
a05a5b64 4690@code{SORT_NONE} disables section sorting by ignoring the command-line
eda680f8
L
4691section sorting option.
4692
252b5132
RH
4693If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
4694@samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
4695precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
4696
4697This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
4698files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
4699sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
4700The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
4701with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
4702linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
4703@smallexample
4704@group
4705SECTIONS @{
4706 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4707 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
4708 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4709 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
4710@}
4711@end group
4712@end smallexample
4713
4714@node Input Section Common
36f63dca 4715@subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
252b5132
RH
4716@cindex common symbol placement
4717@cindex uninitialized data placement
4718A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
4719file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
4720linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
4721named @samp{COMMON}.
4722
4723You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
4724other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
4725particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
4726input files are placed in another section.
4727
4728In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
4729@samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
4730@smallexample
4731.bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
4732@end smallexample
4733
4734@cindex scommon section
4735@cindex small common symbols
4736Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
4737example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
4738symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
4739different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
4740the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
4741symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
4742to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
4743locations.
4744
4745@cindex [COMMON]
4746You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
4747notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
4748@samp{*(COMMON)}.
4749
4750@node Input Section Keep
36f63dca 4751@subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
252b5132
RH
4752@cindex KEEP
4753@cindex garbage collection
4754When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
a1ab1d2a 4755it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
252b5132
RH
4756This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
4757with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
bcaa7b3e 4758@code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
252b5132
RH
4759
4760@node Input Section Example
36f63dca 4761@subsubsection Input Section Example
252b5132
RH
4762The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
4763to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
4764start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
4765@samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
4766follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
4767@samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
4768@samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
4769All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
4770files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
4771
4772@smallexample
4773@group
4774SECTIONS @{
4775 outputa 0x10000 :
4776 @{
4777 all.o
4778 foo.o (.input1)
4779 @}
36f63dca
NC
4780@end group
4781@group
252b5132
RH
4782 outputb :
4783 @{
4784 foo.o (.input2)
4785 foo1.o (.input1)
4786 @}
36f63dca
NC
4787@end group
4788@group
252b5132
RH
4789 outputc :
4790 @{
4791 *(.input1)
4792 *(.input2)
4793 @}
4794@}
4795@end group
a1ab1d2a 4796@end smallexample
252b5132 4797
cbd0eecf
L
4798If an output section's name is the same as the input section's name
4799and is representable as a C identifier, then the linker will
4800automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols: __start_SECNAME and
4801__stop_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the section. These
4802indicate the start address and end address of the output section
4803respectively. Note: most section names are not representable as
4804C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.} character.
4805
252b5132 4806@node Output Section Data
36f63dca 4807@subsection Output Section Data
252b5132
RH
4808@cindex data
4809@cindex section data
4810@cindex output section data
4811@kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
4812@kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
4813@kindex LONG(@var{expression})
4814@kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
4815@kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
4816You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
4817@code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
4818an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
4819parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
4820value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
4821counter.
4822
4823The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
4824store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
4825bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
4826stored.
4827
4828For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
4829of the symbol @samp{addr}:
4830@smallexample
4831BYTE(1)
4832LONG(addr)
4833@end smallexample
4834
4835When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
4836same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
4837target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
4838@code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
4839@code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
4840
4841If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
4842which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
4843When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
4844true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
4845endianness of the first input object file.
4846
36f63dca 4847Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
2b5fc1f5
NC
4848between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
4849@smallexample
4850SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4851@end smallexample
4852whereas this will work:
4853@smallexample
4854SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4855@end smallexample
4856
252b5132
RH
4857@kindex FILL(@var{expression})
4858@cindex holes, filling
4859@cindex unspecified memory
4860You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
4861current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
4862otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
4863gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
a139d329 4864with the value of the expression, repeated as
252b5132
RH
4865necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
4866point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
4867than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
4868different parts of an output section.
4869
4870This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
563e308f 4871value @samp{0x90}:
252b5132 4872@smallexample
563e308f 4873FILL(0x90909090)
252b5132
RH
4874@end smallexample
4875
4876The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
9673c93c 4877section attribute, but it only affects the
252b5132
RH
4878part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
4879entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
9673c93c 4880precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
a139d329 4881expression.
252b5132
RH
4882
4883@node Output Section Keywords
36f63dca 4884@subsection Output Section Keywords
252b5132
RH
4885There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
4886commands.
4887
4888@table @code
4889@kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4890@cindex input filename symbols
4891@cindex filename symbols
4892@item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4893The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
4894The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
4895file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
4896the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
4897
4898This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
4899normally used for any other object file format.
4900
4901@kindex CONSTRUCTORS
4902@cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
4903@cindex constructors, arranging in link
4904@item CONSTRUCTORS
4905When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
4906unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
4907destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
4908arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
4909automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
4910For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
4911linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
4912@code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
4913ignored for other object file formats.
4914
4915The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
7e69709c
AM
4916constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
4917Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
4918the start and end of the global destructors. The
252b5132
RH
4919first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
4920of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
4921compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
4922formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
4923@code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
4924the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
4925destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
4926@code{exit}.
4927
4928For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
4929arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
4930addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
4931and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
4932linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
4933runtime code expects to see.
4934
4935@smallexample
4936 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
4937 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4938 *(.ctors)
4939 LONG(0)
4940 __CTOR_END__ = .;
4941 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
4942 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4943 *(.dtors)
4944 LONG(0)
4945 __DTOR_END__ = .;
4946@end smallexample
4947
4948If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
4949which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
4950are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
4951are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
bcaa7b3e
L
4952command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
4953@code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
4954@samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
252b5132
RH
4955@samp{*(.dtors)}.
4956
4957Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
4958and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
4959need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
4960scripts.
4961
4962@end table
4963
4964@node Output Section Discarding
36f63dca 4965@subsection Output Section Discarding
252b5132
RH
4966@cindex discarding sections
4967@cindex sections, discarding
4968@cindex removing sections
2edab91c
AM
4969The linker will not normally create output sections with no contents.
4970This is for convenience when referring to input sections that may or
4971may not be present in any of the input files. For example:
252b5132 4972@smallexample
49c13adb 4973.foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
252b5132
RH
4974@end smallexample
4975@noindent
4976will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
74541ad4
AM
4977@samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
4978sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
2edab91c
AM
4979space in an output section will also create the output section. So
4980too will assignments to dot even if the assignment does not create
4981space, except for @samp{. = 0}, @samp{. = . + 0}, @samp{. = sym},
4982@samp{. = . + sym} and @samp{. = ALIGN (. != 0, expr, 1)} when
4983@samp{sym} is an absolute symbol of value 0 defined in the script.
4984This allows you to force output of an empty section with @samp{. = .}.
74541ad4 4985
a0976ea4 4986The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
74541ad4
AM
4987on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
4988symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
a0976ea4
AM
4989the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
4990section is discarded.
252b5132
RH
4991
4992@cindex /DISCARD/
4993The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
4994input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
4995section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
4996
a2e098c3
NC
4997Note, sections that match the @samp{/DISCARD/} output section will be
4998discarded even if they are in an ELF section group which has other
4999members which are not being discarded. This is deliberate.
5000Discarding takes precedence over grouping.
5001
252b5132 5002@node Output Section Attributes
36f63dca 5003@subsection Output Section Attributes
252b5132
RH
5004@cindex output section attributes
5005We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
5006like this:
0c71d759 5007
252b5132 5008@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 5009@group
7e7d5768 5010@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759 5011 [AT(@var{lma})]
3bbec4bd 5012 [ALIGN(@var{section_align}) | ALIGN_WITH_INPUT]
0c71d759
NC
5013 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
5014 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
5015 @{
5016 @var{output-section-command}
5017 @var{output-section-command}
5018 @dots{}
562d3460 5019 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
252b5132
RH
5020@end group
5021@end smallexample
0c71d759 5022
252b5132
RH
5023We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
5024@var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
5025remaining section attributes.
5026
a1ab1d2a 5027@menu
252b5132
RH
5028* Output Section Type:: Output section type
5029* Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
bbf115d3 5030* Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
7e7d5768 5031* Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
0c71d759 5032* Output Section Constraint:: Output section constraint
252b5132
RH
5033* Output Section Region:: Output section region
5034* Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
5035* Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
5036@end menu
5037
5038@node Output Section Type
36f63dca 5039@subsubsection Output Section Type
252b5132
RH
5040Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
5041parentheses. The following types are defined:
5042
5043@table @code
5044@item NOLOAD
5045The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
5046loaded into memory when the program is run.
5047@item DSECT
5048@itemx COPY
5049@itemx INFO
5050@itemx OVERLAY
5051These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
5052rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
5053marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
5054section when the program is run.
5055@end table
5056
5057@kindex NOLOAD
5058@cindex prevent unnecessary loading
5059@cindex loading, preventing
5060The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
5061the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
5062the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
5063@samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
2e76e85a 5064need to be loaded when the program is run.
252b5132
RH
5065@smallexample
5066@group
5067SECTIONS @{
5068 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
5069 @dots{}
5070@}
5071@end group
5072@end smallexample
5073
5074@node Output Section LMA
36f63dca 5075@subsubsection Output Section LMA
562d3460 5076@kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
252b5132
RH
5077@kindex AT(@var{lma})
5078@cindex load address
5079@cindex section load address
5080Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
ea5cae92
NC
5081@ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The virtual address is specified by the
5082@pxref{Output Section Address} described earlier. The load address is
5083specified by the @code{AT} or @code{AT>} keywords. Specifying a load
5084address is optional.
6bdafbeb 5085
ea5cae92
NC
5086The @code{AT} keyword takes an expression as an argument. This
5087specifies the exact load address of the section. The @code{AT>} keyword
5088takes the name of a memory region as an argument. @xref{MEMORY}. The
5089load address of the section is set to the next free address in the
5090region, aligned to the section's alignment requirements.
dc0b6aa0
AM
5091
5092If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
ea5cae92
NC
5093section, the linker will use the following heuristic to determine the
5094load address:
5095
5096@itemize @bullet
5097@item
5098If the section has a specific VMA address, then this is used as
5099the LMA address as well.
5100
5101@item
5102If the section is not allocatable then its LMA is set to its VMA.
5103
5104@item
5105Otherwise if a memory region can be found that is compatible
5106with the current section, and this region contains at least one
5107section, then the LMA is set so the difference between the
5108VMA and LMA is the same as the difference between the VMA and LMA of
5109the last section in the located region.
5110
5111@item
5112If no memory regions have been declared then a default region
5113that covers the entire address space is used in the previous step.
5114
5115@item
5116If no suitable region could be found, or there was no previous
5117section then the LMA is set equal to the VMA.
5118@end itemize
252b5132
RH
5119
5120@cindex ROM initialized data
5121@cindex initialized data in ROM
5122This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
5123example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
5124called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
5125@samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
5126even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
5127uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
5128defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
5129counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
5130
5131@smallexample
5132@group
5133SECTIONS
5134 @{
5135 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
a1ab1d2a 5136 .mdata 0x2000 :
252b5132
RH
5137 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
5138 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
5139 .bss 0x3000 :
5140 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
5141@}
5142@end group
5143@end smallexample
5144
5145The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
5146this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
5147the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
5148how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
5149script.
5150
5151@smallexample
5152@group
5153extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
5154char *src = &_etext;
5155char *dst = &_data;
5156
ea5cae92
NC
5157/* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
5158while (dst < &_edata)
252b5132 5159 *dst++ = *src++;
252b5132 5160
ea5cae92 5161/* Zero bss. */
252b5132
RH
5162for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
5163 *dst = 0;
5164@end group
5165@end smallexample
5166
bbf115d3
L
5167@node Forced Output Alignment
5168@subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
5169@kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
5170@cindex forcing output section alignment
5171@cindex output section alignment
1eec346e 5172You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN. As an
13075d04
SH
5173alternative you can enforce that the difference between the VMA and LMA remains
5174intact throughout this output section with the ALIGN_WITH_INPUT attribute.
bbf115d3 5175
7e7d5768
AM
5176@node Forced Input Alignment
5177@subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
5178@kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
5179@cindex forcing input section alignment
5180@cindex input section alignment
5181You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
5182SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
5183sections, whether larger or smaller.
5184
0c71d759
NC
5185@node Output Section Constraint
5186@subsubsection Output Section Constraint
5187@kindex ONLY_IF_RO
5188@kindex ONLY_IF_RW
5189@cindex constraints on output sections
5190You can specify that an output section should only be created if all
5191of its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
5192read-write by using the keyword @code{ONLY_IF_RO} and
5193@code{ONLY_IF_RW} respectively.
5194
252b5132 5195@node Output Section Region
36f63dca 5196@subsubsection Output Section Region
252b5132
RH
5197@kindex >@var{region}
5198@cindex section, assigning to memory region
5199@cindex memory regions and sections
5200You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
5201using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
5202
5203Here is a simple example:
5204@smallexample
5205@group
5206MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
5207SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
5208@end group
5209@end smallexample
5210
5211@node Output Section Phdr
36f63dca 5212@subsubsection Output Section Phdr
252b5132
RH
5213@kindex :@var{phdr}
5214@cindex section, assigning to program header
5215@cindex program headers and sections
5216You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
5217using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
5218one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
5219assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
5220@code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
5221linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
5222
5223Here is a simple example:
5224@smallexample
5225@group
5226PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
5227SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
5228@end group
5229@end smallexample
5230
5231@node Output Section Fill
36f63dca 5232@subsubsection Output Section Fill
252b5132
RH
5233@kindex =@var{fillexp}
5234@cindex section fill pattern
5235@cindex fill pattern, entire section
5236You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
5237@samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
5238(@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
5239within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
a139d329
AM
5240alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
5241necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
9673c93c 5242of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
a139d329
AM
5243an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
5244fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
9673c93c 5245other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
a139d329
AM
5246pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
5247expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
252b5132
RH
5248
5249You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
9673c93c 5250output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
252b5132
RH
5251
5252Here is a simple example:
5253@smallexample
5254@group
563e308f 5255SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
252b5132
RH
5256@end group
5257@end smallexample
5258
5259@node Overlay Description
36f63dca 5260@subsection Overlay Description
252b5132
RH
5261@kindex OVERLAY
5262@cindex overlays
5263An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
5264are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
5265the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
5266copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
5267required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
5268can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
5269than another.
5270
5271Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
5272@code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
5273output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
5274command is as follows:
5275@smallexample
5276@group
5277OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
5278 @{
5279 @var{secname1}
5280 @{
5281 @var{output-section-command}
5282 @var{output-section-command}
5283 @dots{}
5284 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
5285 @var{secname2}
5286 @{
5287 @var{output-section-command}
5288 @var{output-section-command}
5289 @dots{}
5290 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
5291 @dots{}
abc9061b 5292 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}] [,]
252b5132
RH
5293@end group
5294@end smallexample
5295
5296Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
5297section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
5298section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
11e7fd74 5299those within the general @code{SECTIONS} construct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
252b5132
RH
5300except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
5301sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
5302
abc9061b
CC
5303The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fill} is used and
5304the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
5305
252b5132
RH
5306The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
5307addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
5308memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
5309whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
5310and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
5311and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
5312
56dd11f0
NC
5313If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there are any
5314references among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since
5315the sections all run at the same address, it normally does not make
5316sense for one section to refer directly to another.
5317@xref{Miscellaneous Commands, NOCROSSREFS}.
252b5132
RH
5318
5319For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
34711ca3 5320provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
252b5132
RH
5321defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
5322@code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
5323the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
5324within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
5325symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
5326
5327At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
5328the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
5329
5330Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
5331@code{SECTIONS} construct.
5332@smallexample
5333@group
5334 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
5335 @{
5336 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
5337 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
5338 @}
5339@end group
5340@end smallexample
5341@noindent
5342This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
5343address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
5344@samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
34711ca3 5345following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
252b5132
RH
5346@code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
5347@code{__load_stop_text1}.
5348
5349C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
5350like the following.
5351
5352@smallexample
5353@group
5354 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
5355 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
5356 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
5357@end group
5358@end smallexample
5359
5360Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
5361everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
5362example could have been written identically as follows.
5363
5364@smallexample
5365@group
5366 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
5367 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
5368 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
252b5132 5369 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
5370 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
5371 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
252b5132
RH
5372 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
5373@end group
5374@end smallexample
5375
5376@node MEMORY
36f63dca 5377@section MEMORY Command
252b5132
RH
5378@kindex MEMORY
5379@cindex memory regions
5380@cindex regions of memory
5381@cindex allocating memory
5382@cindex discontinuous memory
5383The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
5384memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
5385
5386The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
5387memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
5388may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
5389can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
5390set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
5391regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
5392around to fit into the available regions.
5393
127fcdff
AB
5394A linker script may contain many uses of the @code{MEMORY} command,
5395however, all memory blocks defined are treated as if they were
5396specified inside a single @code{MEMORY} command. The syntax for
5397@code{MEMORY} is:
252b5132
RH
5398@smallexample
5399@group
a1ab1d2a 5400MEMORY
252b5132
RH
5401 @{
5402 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
5403 @dots{}
5404 @}
5405@end group
5406@end smallexample
5407
5408The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
5409region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
5410Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5411with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
4a93e180
NC
5412must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command. However you can
5413add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
9d5777a3 5414command.
252b5132
RH
5415
5416@cindex memory region attributes
5417The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
5418whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
5419not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
5420@ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
5421section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
5422the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
5423them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
5424
5425The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
5426@table @samp
5427@item R
5428Read-only section
5429@item W
5430Read/write section
5431@item X
5432Executable section
5433@item A
5434Allocatable section
5435@item I
5436Initialized section
5437@item L
5438Same as @samp{I}
5439@item !
c09e9a8c 5440Invert the sense of any of the attributes that follow
252b5132
RH
5441@end table
5442
81c688d5 5443If an unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
252b5132 5444@samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
81c688d5
NC
5445attribute reverses the test for the characters that follow, so that an
5446unmapped section will be placed in the memory region only if it does
5447not match any of the attributes listed afterwards. Thus an attribute
5448string of @samp{RW!X} will match any unmapped section that has either
5449or both of the @samp{R} and @samp{W} attributes, but only as long as
5450the section does not also have the @samp{X} attribute.
252b5132
RH
5451
5452@kindex ORIGIN =
5453@kindex o =
5454@kindex org =
9cd6d51a
NC
5455The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
5456the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
5457cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
5458abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
5459@code{ORG}).
252b5132
RH
5460
5461@kindex LENGTH =
5462@kindex len =
5463@kindex l =
5464The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
5465region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
9cd6d51a
NC
5466be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
5467@code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
252b5132
RH
5468
5469In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
5470available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
5471and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
5472linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
5473is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
5474or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
5475explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
5476region.
5477
5478@smallexample
5479@group
a1ab1d2a 5480MEMORY
252b5132
RH
5481 @{
5482 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
5483 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
5484 @}
5485@end group
5486@end smallexample
5487
5488Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
5489specific output sections into that memory region by using the
5490@samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
5491a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
5492output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
5493was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
5494the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
5495output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
5496region, the linker will issue an error message.
5497
3ec57632 5498It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
c0065db7 5499expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
3ec57632
NC
5500@code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
5501
5502@smallexample
5503@group
c0065db7 5504 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
3ec57632
NC
5505@end group
5506@end smallexample
5507
252b5132
RH
5508@node PHDRS
5509@section PHDRS Command
5510@kindex PHDRS
5511@cindex program headers
5512@cindex ELF program headers
5513@cindex program segments
5514@cindex segments, ELF
5515The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
5516@dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
5517loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
5518program with the @samp{-p} option.
5519
5520When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
5521reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
5522program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
5523This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
5524interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
5525
5526The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
5527in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
5528precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
5529the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
5530not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
5531
5532The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
5533generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
5534ignore @code{PHDRS}.
5535
5536This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
5537@code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
5538
5539@smallexample
5540@group
5541PHDRS
5542@{
5543 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
5544 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
5545@}
5546@end group
5547@end smallexample
5548
5549The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
5550of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
5551header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5552with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
5c1a3f0f
NS
5553must have a distinct name. The headers are processed in order and it
5554is usual for them to map to sections in ascending load address order.
252b5132
RH
5555
5556Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
5557system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
5558specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
5559sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
5560attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
5561Section Phdr}.
5562
5563It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
5564merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
5565repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
5566contain the section.
5567
5568If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
5569then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
5570not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
5571convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
5572placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
5573default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
5574segment at all.
5575
5576@kindex FILEHDR
5577@kindex PHDRS
5c1a3f0f 5578You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords after
252b5132
RH
5579the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
5580The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
5581file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
5c1a3f0f 5582include the ELF program headers themselves. If applied to a loadable
4100cea3
AM
5583segment (@code{PT_LOAD}), all prior loadable segments must have one of
5584these keywords.
252b5132
RH
5585
5586The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
5587value of the keyword.
5588
5589@table @asis
5590@item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
5591Indicates an unused program header.
5592
5593@item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
5594Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
5595the file.
5596
5597@item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
5598Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
5599
5600@item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
5601Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
5602found.
5603
5604@item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
5605Indicates a segment holding note information.
5606
5607@item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
5608A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
5609ABI.
5610
5611@item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
5612Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
5613
1a9ccd70
NC
5614@item @code{PT_TLS} (7)
5615Indicates a segment containing thread local storage.
5616
252b5132
RH
5617@item @var{expression}
5618An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
5619be used for types not defined above.
5620@end table
5621
5622You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
5623in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
5624@code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
5625Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
5626output section attribute.
5627
5628The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
5629which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
5630explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
5631an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
5632header.
5633
5634Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
5635headers used on a native ELF system.
5636
5637@example
5638@group
5639PHDRS
5640@{
5641 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
5642 interp PT_INTERP ;
5643 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
5644 data PT_LOAD ;
5645 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
5646@}
5647
5648SECTIONS
5649@{
5650 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
5651 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
5652 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
5653 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
5654 @dots{}
5655 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
5656 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
5657 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
5658 @dots{}
5659@}
5660@end group
5661@end example
5662
5663@node VERSION
5664@section VERSION Command
5665@kindex VERSION @{script text@}
5666@cindex symbol versions
5667@cindex version script
5668@cindex versions of symbols
5669The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
5670only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
5671symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
5672a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
5673shared library.
5674
5675You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
5676you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
5677also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
5678
5679The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
5680@smallexample
5681VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
5682@end smallexample
5683
5684The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
5685Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
5686version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
5687version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
5688version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
5689scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
5690library.
5691
5692The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
5693examples.
5694
5695@smallexample
5696VERS_1.1 @{
5697 global:
5698 foo1;
5699 local:
a1ab1d2a
UD
5700 old*;
5701 original*;
5702 new*;
252b5132
RH
5703@};
5704
5705VERS_1.2 @{
5706 foo2;
5707@} VERS_1.1;
5708
5709VERS_2.0 @{
5710 bar1; bar2;
c0065db7 5711 extern "C++" @{
86043bbb 5712 ns::*;
bb1515f2
MF
5713 "f(int, double)";
5714 @};
252b5132
RH
5715@} VERS_1.2;
5716@end smallexample
5717
5718This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
5719version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
5720The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
5721a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
313e35ee
AM
5722of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
5723symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
5724is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
5725in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
86043bbb
MM
5726However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
5727name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
252b5132
RH
5728
5729Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
5730depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
5731to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
5732
5733Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
5734depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
5735and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
5736
5737When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
5738specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
5739unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
a981ed6f 5740unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
ae5a3597
AM
5741somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
5742wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
5743wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
5744set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
5745ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
252b5132
RH
5746
5747The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
5748they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
5749could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
5750However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
5751
0f6bf451 5752Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
6b9b879a
JJ
5753in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
5754symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
5755won't.
5756
5757@smallexample
7c9c73be 5758@{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
9d201f2f 5759@end smallexample
6b9b879a 5760
252b5132
RH
5761When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
5762symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
5763requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
5764shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
5765loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
5766linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
5767application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
5768way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
5769all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
5770search for each symbol reference.
5771
5772The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
5773doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
5774that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
5775functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
5776the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
5777required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
5778that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
5779versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
5780the libraries being used with the application are too old.
5781
5782There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
5783first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
5784source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
5785script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
5786maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
5787@smallexample
5788__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5789@end smallexample
5790@noindent
5791in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
5792be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
5793The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
96a94295
L
5794@samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
5795takes precedence over a version script.
252b5132
RH
5796
5797The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
5798function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
5799an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
5800version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
5801linked against the old interface to continue to function.
5802
5803To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
5804source file. Here is an example:
5805
5806@smallexample
5807__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
5808__asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5809__asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
5810__asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
5811@end smallexample
5812
5813In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
5814unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
5815example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
5816@samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
5817
5818When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
5819some way to specify a default version to which external references to
5820this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
5821@samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
5822declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
5823you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
5824
5825If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
5826within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
36f63dca 5827(i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
252b5132
RH
5828specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
5829
cb840a31
L
5830You can also specify the language in the version script:
5831
5832@smallexample
5833VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
5834@end smallexample
5835
c0065db7 5836The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
cb840a31
L
5837The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
5838demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
bb1515f2
MF
5839patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}. The default
5840@samp{lang} is @samp{C}.
cb840a31 5841
86043bbb
MM
5842Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
5843described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
5844or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
5845the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
5846whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
5847cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
5848might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
5849should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
5850expect when you upgrade.
5851
252b5132
RH
5852@node Expressions
5853@section Expressions in Linker Scripts
5854@cindex expressions
5855@cindex arithmetic
5856The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
5857that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
5858expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
5859host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
5860
5861You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
5862
5863The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
5864expressions.
5865
5866@menu
5867* Constants:: Constants
0c71d759 5868* Symbolic Constants:: Symbolic constants
252b5132 5869* Symbols:: Symbol Names
ecca9871 5870* Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
252b5132
RH
5871* Location Counter:: The Location Counter
5872* Operators:: Operators
5873* Evaluation:: Evaluation
5874* Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
5875* Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
5876@end menu
5877
5878@node Constants
5879@subsection Constants
5880@cindex integer notation
5881@cindex constants in linker scripts
5882All constants are integers.
5883
5884As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
5885octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
8a308ae8 5886hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
11e7fd74 5887@samp{H} for hexadecimal, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
8a308ae8
NC
5888@samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
5889value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
252b5132
RH
5890
5891@cindex scaled integers
5892@cindex K and M integer suffixes
5893@cindex M and K integer suffixes
5894@cindex suffixes for integers
5895@cindex integer suffixes
5896In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
5897constant by
5898@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5899@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5900@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5901@code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
5902@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5903@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5904@tex
5905${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
5906@end tex
5907@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
8a308ae8
NC
5908respectively. For example, the following
5909all refer to the same quantity:
5910
252b5132 5911@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5912_fourk_1 = 4K;
5913_fourk_2 = 4096;
5914_fourk_3 = 0x1000;
8a308ae8 5915_fourk_4 = 10000o;
252b5132
RH
5916@end smallexample
5917
8a308ae8
NC
5918Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
5919conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
5920
0c71d759
NC
5921@node Symbolic Constants
5922@subsection Symbolic Constants
5923@cindex symbolic constants
5924@kindex CONSTANT
a094d01f 5925It is possible to refer to target-specific constants via the use of
0c71d759
NC
5926the @code{CONSTANT(@var{name})} operator, where @var{name} is one of:
5927
5928@table @code
5929@item MAXPAGESIZE
5930@kindex MAXPAGESIZE
5931The target's maximum page size.
5932
5933@item COMMONPAGESIZE
5934@kindex COMMONPAGESIZE
5935The target's default page size.
5936@end table
5937
5938So for example:
5939
5940@smallexample
9d5777a3 5941 .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : @{ *(.text) @}
0c71d759
NC
5942@end smallexample
5943
5944will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
5945supported by the target.
5946
252b5132
RH
5947@node Symbols
5948@subsection Symbol Names
5949@cindex symbol names
5950@cindex names
5951@cindex quoted symbol names
5952@kindex "
5953Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
5954and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
5955Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
5956specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
5957keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
5958@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5959"SECTION" = 9;
5960"with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
252b5132
RH
5961@end smallexample
5962
5963Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
5964to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
5965whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
5966
ecca9871
L
5967@node Orphan Sections
5968@subsection Orphan Sections
5969@cindex orphan
5970Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
5971are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
5972script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
a87ded7b
AB
5973output file by either finding, or creating a suitable output section
5974in which to place the orphaned input section.
5975
5976If the name of an orphaned input section exactly matches the name of
5977an existing output section, then the orphaned input section will be
5978placed at the end of that output section.
5979
5980If there is no output section with a matching name then new output
5981sections will be created. Each new output section will have the same
5982name as the orphan section placed within it. If there are multiple
5983orphan sections with the same name, these will all be combined into
5984one new output section.
5985
5986If new output sections are created to hold orphaned input sections,
5987then the linker must decide where to place these new output sections
e299b355
AM
5988in relation to existing output sections. On most modern targets, the
5989linker attempts to place orphan sections after sections of the same
5990attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc. If no
5991sections with matching attributes are found, or your target lacks this
5992support, the orphan section is placed at the end of the file.
ecca9871 5993
a05a5b64
TP
5994The command-line options @samp{--orphan-handling} and @samp{--unique}
5995(@pxref{Options,,Command-line Options}) can be used to control which
c005eb9e
AB
5996output sections an orphan is placed in.
5997
252b5132
RH
5998@node Location Counter
5999@subsection The Location Counter
6000@kindex .
6001@cindex dot
6002@cindex location counter
6003@cindex current output location
6004The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
6005current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
6006location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
6007within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
6008anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
6009
6010@cindex holes
6011Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
6012moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
dc0b6aa0
AM
6013location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
6014and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
6015doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
252b5132
RH
6016
6017@smallexample
6018SECTIONS
6019@{
6020 output :
6021 @{
6022 file1(.text)
6023 . = . + 1000;
6024 file2(.text)
6025 . += 1000;
6026 file3(.text)
563e308f 6027 @} = 0x12345678;
252b5132
RH
6028@}
6029@end smallexample
6030@noindent
6031In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
6032located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
6033followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
6034@file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
563e308f 6035@samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
252b5132
RH
6036specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
6037
5c6bbab8
NC
6038@cindex dot inside sections
6039Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
6040current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
69da35b5 6041statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
5c6bbab8
NC
6042absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
6043however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
6044not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
6045
6046@smallexample
6047SECTIONS
6048@{
6049 . = 0x100
6050 .text: @{
6051 *(.text)
6052 . = 0x200
6053 @}
6054 . = 0x500
6055 .data: @{
6056 *(.data)
6057 . += 0x600
6058 @}
6059@}
6060@end smallexample
6061
6062The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
6063and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
6064the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
6065much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
6066move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
6067and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
6068the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
6069the @samp{.data} output section itself.
6070
b5666f2f
AM
6071@cindex dot outside sections
6072Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
6073output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
6074needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
6075
6076@smallexample
6077SECTIONS
6078@{
6079 start_of_text = . ;
6080 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
6081 end_of_text = . ;
6082
6083 start_of_data = . ;
6084 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
6085 end_of_data = . ;
6086@}
6087@end smallexample
6088
6089If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
6090not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
6091between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
6092should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
6093blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
6094the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
6095sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
6096statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
6097special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
6098place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
6099as follows:
6100
6101@smallexample
6102SECTIONS
6103@{
6104 start_of_text = . ;
6105 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
6106 end_of_text = . ;
6107
6108 start_of_data = . ;
6109 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
6110 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
6111 end_of_data = . ;
6112@}
6113@end smallexample
6114
6115This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
6116@code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
6117placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
6118assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
6119a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
6120section. So you could write:
6121
6122@smallexample
6123SECTIONS
6124@{
6125 start_of_text = . ;
6126 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
6127 end_of_text = . ;
6128
6129 . = . ;
6130 start_of_data = . ;
6131 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
6132 end_of_data = . ;
6133@}
6134@end smallexample
6135
6136Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
6137@code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
6138
252b5132
RH
6139@need 2000
6140@node Operators
6141@subsection Operators
6142@cindex operators for arithmetic
6143@cindex arithmetic operators
6144@cindex precedence in expressions
6145The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
6146the standard bindings and precedence levels:
6147@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 6148@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
6149@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6150@smallexample
6151precedence associativity Operators Notes
6152(highest)
61531 left ! - ~ (1)
61542 left * / %
61553 left + -
61564 left >> <<
61575 left == != > < <= >=
61586 left &
61597 left |
61608 left &&
61619 left ||
616210 right ? :
616311 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
6164(lowest)
6165@end smallexample
6166Notes:
a1ab1d2a 6167(1) Prefix operators
252b5132
RH
6168(2) @xref{Assignments}.
6169@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 6170@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
6171@tex
6172\vskip \baselineskip
6173%"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
6174\hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
6175\hrule
6176\halign
6177{\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
6178height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6179&Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
6180height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6181\noalign{\hrule}
6182height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6183&highest&&&&&\cr
6184% '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
a1ab1d2a 6185&1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
252b5132
RH
6186&2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
6187&3&&left&&+ -&\cr
6188&4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
6189&5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
6190&6&&left&&\&&\cr
6191&7&&left&&|&\cr
6192&8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
6193&9&&left&&||&\cr
6194&10&&right&&? :&\cr
6195&11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
6196&lowest&&&&&\cr
6197height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
6198\hrule}
6199@end tex
6200@iftex
6201{
6202@obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
6203@dag@quad Prefix operators.
6204@ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
6205}
6206@end iftex
6207@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6208
6209@node Evaluation
6210@subsection Evaluation
6211@cindex lazy evaluation
6212@cindex expression evaluation order
6213The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
6214an expression when absolutely necessary.
6215
6216The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
6217address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
6218regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
6219as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
6220
6221However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
6222until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
6223other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
6224for use in the symbol assignment expression.
6225
6226The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
6227assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
6228allocation.
6229
6230Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
6231@samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
6232
6233If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
6234available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
6235following
6236@smallexample
6237@group
6238SECTIONS
6239 @{
a1ab1d2a 6240 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
252b5132
RH
6241 @{ *(.text) @}
6242 @}
6243@end group
6244@end smallexample
6245@noindent
6246will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
6247address}.
6248
6249@node Expression Section
6250@subsection The Section of an Expression
6251@cindex expression sections
6252@cindex absolute expressions
6253@cindex relative expressions
6254@cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
6255@cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
6256@cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
7542af2a
AM
6257Addresses and symbols may be section relative, or absolute. A section
6258relative symbol is relocatable. If you request relocatable output
6259using the @samp{-r} option, a further link operation may change the
6260value of a section relative symbol. On the other hand, an absolute
6261symbol will retain the same value throughout any further link
6262operations.
6263
abf4be64
AM
6264Some terms in linker expressions are addresses. This is true of
6265section relative symbols and for builtin functions that return an
6266address, such as @code{ADDR}, @code{LOADADDR}, @code{ORIGIN} and
6267@code{SEGMENT_START}. Other terms are simply numbers, or are builtin
6268functions that return a non-address value, such as @code{LENGTH}.
01554a74
AM
6269One complication is that unless you set @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")}
6270(@pxref{Miscellaneous Commands}), numbers and absolute symbols are treated
5c3049d2
AM
6271differently depending on their location, for compatibility with older
6272versions of @code{ld}. Expressions appearing outside an output
6273section definition treat all numbers as absolute addresses.
6274Expressions appearing inside an output section definition treat
01554a74
AM
6275absolute symbols as numbers. If @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} is
6276given, then absolute symbols and numbers are simply treated as numbers
6277everywhere.
5c3049d2
AM
6278
6279In the following simple example,
252b5132 6280
7542af2a
AM
6281@smallexample
6282@group
6283SECTIONS
6284 @{
6285 . = 0x100;
6286 __executable_start = 0x100;
6287 .data :
6288 @{
6289 . = 0x10;
6290 __data_start = 0x10;
6291 *(.data)
6292 @}
6293 @dots{}
6294 @}
6295@end group
6296@end smallexample
252b5132 6297
7542af2a
AM
6298both @code{.} and @code{__executable_start} are set to the absolute
6299address 0x100 in the first two assignments, then both @code{.} and
6300@code{__data_start} are set to 0x10 relative to the @code{.data}
6301section in the second two assignments.
252b5132 6302
5c3049d2
AM
6303For expressions involving numbers, relative addresses and absolute
6304addresses, ld follows these rules to evaluate terms:
7542af2a
AM
6305
6306@itemize @bullet
6307@item
c05f749e
AM
6308Unary operations on an absolute address or number, and binary
6309operations on two absolute addresses or two numbers, or between one
6310absolute address and a number, apply the operator to the value(s).
6311@item
7542af2a
AM
6312Unary operations on a relative address, and binary operations on two
6313relative addresses in the same section or between one relative address
6314and a number, apply the operator to the offset part of the address(es).
6315@item
c05f749e
AM
6316Other binary operations, that is, between two relative addresses not
6317in the same section, or between a relative address and an absolute
6318address, first convert any non-absolute term to an absolute address
6319before applying the operator.
7542af2a
AM
6320@end itemize
6321
6322The result section of each sub-expression is as follows:
6323
6324@itemize @bullet
6325@item
6326An operation involving only numbers results in a number.
6327@item
6328The result of comparisons, @samp{&&} and @samp{||} is also a number.
6329@item
9bc8bb33 6330The result of other binary arithmetic and logical operations on two
11e7fd74 6331relative addresses in the same section or two absolute addresses
94b41882
AM
6332(after above conversions) is also a number when
6333@code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} or inside an output section definition
6334but an absolute address otherwise.
9bc8bb33
AM
6335@item
6336The result of other operations on relative addresses or one
6337relative address and a number, is a relative address in the same
6338section as the relative operand(s).
7542af2a
AM
6339@item
6340The result of other operations on absolute addresses (after above
6341conversions) is an absolute address.
6342@end itemize
252b5132
RH
6343
6344You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
6345to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
6346create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
6347section @samp{.data}:
6348@smallexample
6349SECTIONS
6350 @{
6351 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
6352 @}
6353@end smallexample
6354@noindent
6355If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
6356@samp{.data} section.
6357
7542af2a
AM
6358Using @code{LOADADDR} also forces an expression absolute, since this
6359particular builtin function returns an absolute address.
6360
252b5132
RH
6361@node Builtin Functions
6362@subsection Builtin Functions
6363@cindex functions in expressions
6364The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
6365use in linker script expressions.
6366
6367@table @code
6368@item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6369@kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6370@cindex expression, absolute
6371Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
6372of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
6373value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
6374normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
6375
6376@item ADDR(@var{section})
6377@kindex ADDR(@var{section})
6378@cindex section address in expression
7542af2a 6379Return the address (VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
252b5132 6380script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
7542af2a
AM
6381the following example, @code{start_of_output_1}, @code{symbol_1} and
6382@code{symbol_2} are assigned equivalent values, except that
6383@code{symbol_1} will be relative to the @code{.output1} section while
6384the other two will be absolute:
252b5132
RH
6385@smallexample
6386@group
6387SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6388 .output1 :
a1ab1d2a 6389 @{
252b5132
RH
6390 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
6391 @dots{}
6392 @}
6393 .output :
6394 @{
6395 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
6396 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
6397 @}
6398@dots{} @}
6399@end group
6400@end smallexample
6401
876f4090
NS
6402@item ALIGN(@var{align})
6403@itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
6404@kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
6405@kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
252b5132
RH
6406@cindex round up location counter
6407@cindex align location counter
876f4090
NS
6408@cindex round up expression
6409@cindex align expression
6410Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
6411to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
6412doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
6413arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
6414expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
e0a3af22 6415equivalent to @code{ALIGN(ABSOLUTE(.), @var{align})}).
876f4090
NS
6416
6417Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
6418next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
6419variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
6420input sections:
252b5132
RH
6421@smallexample
6422@group
6423SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6424 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
6425 *(.data)
6426 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
6427 @}
6428@dots{} @}
6429@end group
6430@end smallexample
6431@noindent
6432The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
6433a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
6434a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
6435of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
6436
6437The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
6438
362c1d1a
NS
6439@item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6440@kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6441@cindex section alignment
6442Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6443been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6444evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6445the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
6446value in that section.
6447@smallexample
6448@group
6449SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6450 .output @{
6451 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
6452 @dots{}
6453 @}
6454@dots{} @}
6455@end group
6456@end smallexample
6457
252b5132
RH
6458@item BLOCK(@var{exp})
6459@kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
6460This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
6461scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
6462section.
6463
2d20f7bf
JJ
6464@item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6465@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6466This is equivalent to either
6467@smallexample
6468(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
6469@end smallexample
6470or
6471@smallexample
fe6052e1
AM
6472(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize})
6473 + ((. + @var{commonpagesize} - 1) & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
2d20f7bf
JJ
6474@end smallexample
6475@noindent
6476depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
6477for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
6478@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
6479If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
6480memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
6481bytes in the on-disk file.
6482
6483This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
6484any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
6485@var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
def5c83c
AM
6486be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for while still
6487running on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}. Note however
6488that @samp{-z relro} protection will not be effective if the system
6489page size is larger than @var{commonpagesize}.
2d20f7bf
JJ
6490
6491@noindent
6492Example:
6493@smallexample
6494 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
6495@end smallexample
6496
6497@item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6498@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6499This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
6500evaluation purposes.
6501
6502@smallexample
6503 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
6504@end smallexample
6505
a4f5ad88
JJ
6506@item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6507@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6508This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
eec2f3ed 6509@samp{-z relro} option is used.
a4f5ad88
JJ
6510When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
6511does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
def5c83c
AM
6512@var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the @var{commonpagesize}
6513argument given to @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}. If present in the linker
6514script, it must be placed between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
eec2f3ed
AM
6515@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}. Evaluates to the second argument plus any
6516padding needed at the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment due to
6517section alignment.
a4f5ad88
JJ
6518
6519@smallexample
6520 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
6521@end smallexample
6522
252b5132
RH
6523@item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6524@kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6525@cindex symbol defaults
6526Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
420e579c
HPN
6527defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
6528return 0. You can use this function to provide
252b5132
RH
6529default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
6530shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
6531the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
6532existed, its value is preserved:
6533
6534@smallexample
6535@group
6536SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6537 .text : @{
6538 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
6539 @dots{}
6540 @}
6541 @dots{}
6542@}
6543@end group
6544@end smallexample
6545
3ec57632
NC
6546@item LENGTH(@var{memory})
6547@kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
6548Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6549
252b5132
RH
6550@item LOADADDR(@var{section})
6551@kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
6552@cindex section load address in expression
7542af2a 6553Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. (@pxref{Output
252b5132
RH
6554Section LMA}).
6555
2e53f7d6
NC
6556@item LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6557@kindex LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6558Return the binary logarithm of @var{exp} rounded towards infinity.
6559@code{LOG2CEIL(0)} returns 0.
6560
252b5132
RH
6561@kindex MAX
6562@item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6563Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6564
6565@kindex MIN
6566@item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6567Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6568
6569@item NEXT(@var{exp})
6570@kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
6571@cindex unallocated address, next
6572Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
6573This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
6574use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
6575output file, the two functions are equivalent.
6576
3ec57632
NC
6577@item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6578@kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6579Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6580
ba916c8a
MM
6581@item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6582@kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6583Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
c5da8c7d
NC
6584value has already been given for this segment (with a command-line
6585@samp{-T} option) then that value will be returned otherwise the value
6586will be @var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option
6587can only be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
7542af2a 6588``bss'' sections, but you can use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
ba916c8a
MM
6589name.
6590
252b5132
RH
6591@item SIZEOF(@var{section})
6592@kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
6593@cindex section size
6594Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6595been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6596evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6597@code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
6598@smallexample
6599@group
6600SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6601 .output @{
6602 .start = . ;
6603 @dots{}
6604 .end = . ;
6605 @}
6606 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
6607 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
6608@dots{} @}
6609@end group
6610@end smallexample
6611
6612@item SIZEOF_HEADERS
6613@itemx sizeof_headers
6614@kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
6615@cindex header size
6616Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
6617information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
6618this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
6619choose, to facilitate paging.
6620
6621@cindex not enough room for program headers
6622@cindex program headers, not enough room
6623When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
6624@code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
6625number of program headers before it has determined all the section
6626addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
6627additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
6628room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
6629the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
6630script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
6631you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
6632command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
6633@end table
6634
6635@node Implicit Linker Scripts
6636@section Implicit Linker Scripts
6637@cindex implicit linker scripts
6638If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
6639an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
6640linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
6641linker will report an error.
6642
6643An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
6644
6645Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
6646assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
6647commands.
6648
6649Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
6650at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
6651read. This can affect archive searching.
6652
6653@ifset GENERIC
6654@node Machine Dependent
6655@chapter Machine Dependent Features
6656
6657@cindex machine dependencies
ff5dcc92
SC
6658@command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
6659sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
252b5132
RH
6660functionality are not listed.
6661
6662@menu
36f63dca
NC
6663@ifset H8300
6664* H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
6665@end ifset
7ca01ed9
NC
6666@ifset M68HC11
6667* M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6668@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
6669@ifset ARM
6670* ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
6671@end ifset
6672@ifset HPPA
6673* HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
6674@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
6675@ifset M68K
6676* M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6677@end ifset
833794fc
MR
6678@ifset MIPS
6679* MIPS:: @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6680@end ifset
3c3bdf30 6681@ifset MMIX
36f63dca 6682* MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
3c3bdf30 6683@end ifset
2469cfa2 6684@ifset MSP430
36f63dca 6685* MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
2469cfa2 6686@end ifset
35c08157
KLC
6687@ifset NDS32
6688* NDS32:: @command{ld} and NDS32
6689@end ifset
78058a5e
SL
6690@ifset NIOSII
6691* Nios II:: @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
6692@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
6693@ifset POWERPC
6694* PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6695@end ifset
6696@ifset POWERPC64
6697* PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6698@end ifset
b4cbbe8f
AK
6699@ifset S/390
6700* S/390 ELF:: @command{ld} and S/390 ELF Support
6701@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
6702@ifset SPU
6703* SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6704@end ifset
74459f0e 6705@ifset TICOFF
ff5dcc92 6706* TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
74459f0e 6707@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
6708@ifset WIN32
6709* WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6710@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
6711@ifset XTENSA
6712* Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
6713@end ifset
252b5132
RH
6714@end menu
6715@end ifset
6716
252b5132
RH
6717@ifset H8300
6718@ifclear GENERIC
6719@raisesections
6720@end ifclear
6721
6722@node H8/300
ff5dcc92 6723@section @command{ld} and the H8/300
252b5132
RH
6724
6725@cindex H8/300 support
ff5dcc92 6726For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
252b5132
RH
6727you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6728
6729@table @emph
6730@cindex relaxing on H8/300
6731@item relaxing address modes
ff5dcc92 6732@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
252b5132
RH
6733targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6734program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6735respectively.
6736
6737@cindex synthesizing on H8/300
6738@item synthesizing instructions
81f5558e 6739@c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really? -> mov.b only, at least on H8, H8H, H8S
ff5dcc92 6740@command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
252b5132
RH
6741sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6742page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
6743(That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
6744@samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
6745top page of memory).
1502569c 6746
81f5558e
NC
6747@command{ld} finds all @code{mov} instructions which use the register
6748indirect with 32-bit displacement addressing mode, but use a small
6749displacement inside 16-bit displacement range, and changes them to use
6750the 16-bit displacement form. (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b
6751@code{@@}@var{d}:32,ERx} into @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{d}:16,ERx}
6752whenever the displacement @var{d} is in the 16 bit signed integer
6753range. Only implemented in ELF-format ld).
6754
1502569c 6755@item bit manipulation instructions
c0065db7 6756@command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
1502569c 6757biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
c0065db7 6758which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
1502569c
NC
6759page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
6760(That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
c0065db7 6761@samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c
NC
6762the top page of memory).
6763
6764@item system control instructions
c0065db7
RM
6765@command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
676632 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
1502569c
NC
6767changes them to use 16 bit address form.
6768(That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
c0065db7 6769@samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c 6770the top page of memory).
252b5132
RH
6771@end table
6772
6773@ifclear GENERIC
6774@lowersections
6775@end ifclear
6776@end ifset
6777
36f63dca 6778@ifclear GENERIC
c2dcd04e 6779@ifset Renesas
36f63dca 6780@c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
c2dcd04e
NC
6781@c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
6782@node Renesas
6783@chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
36f63dca 6784
c2dcd04e
NC
6785@command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
6786H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
6787options are required for these chips.
36f63dca
NC
6788@end ifset
6789@end ifclear
6790
36f63dca
NC
6791@ifset ARM
6792@ifclear GENERIC
6793@raisesections
6794@end ifclear
6795
93fd0973
SC
6796@ifset M68HC11
6797@ifclear GENERIC
6798@raisesections
6799@end ifclear
6800
6801@node M68HC11/68HC12
6802@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6803
6804@cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
6805
6806@subsection Linker Relaxation
6807
6808For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
6809optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6810
6811@table @emph
6812@cindex relaxing on M68HC11
6813@item relaxing address modes
6814@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6815targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6816program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6817respectively.
6818
6819@command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
6820transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
6821page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
6822
6823@item relaxing gcc instruction group
6824When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
6825of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
6826addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
6827@code{bset} instructions.
6828
6829@end table
6830
6831@subsection Trampoline Generation
6832
6833@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
6834@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
6835For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
6836call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
c0065db7 6837will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
93fd0973
SC
6838trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
6839case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
6840point to the function trampoline.
6841
6842@ifclear GENERIC
6843@lowersections
6844@end ifclear
6845@end ifset
6846
36f63dca 6847@node ARM
3674e28a 6848@section @command{ld} and the ARM family
36f63dca
NC
6849
6850@cindex ARM interworking support
6851@kindex --support-old-code
6852For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
b45619c0 6853between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
36f63dca
NC
6854been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
6855line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
6856libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
a05a5b64 6857option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command-line switch should be
36f63dca
NC
6858given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
6859which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
6860the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
6861non-interworking aware Thumb code.
6862
6863@cindex thumb entry point
6864@cindex entry point, thumb
6865@kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
6866The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
6867@samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
6868But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
6869branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
6870executing in Thumb mode straight away.
6871
ce11ba6c
KT
6872@cindex PE import table prefixing
6873@kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
6874The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
6875the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
11e7fd74 6876element prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
ce11ba6c
KT
6877import tables. By default this option is turned off.
6878
e489d0ae
PB
6879@cindex BE8
6880@kindex --be8
6881The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
080bb7bb
NC
6882executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian
6883objects - ie ones which have been assembled with the @option{-EB}
6884option. The resulting image will contain big-endian data and
6885little-endian code.
e489d0ae 6886
3674e28a
PB
6887@cindex TARGET1
6888@kindex --target1-rel
6889@kindex --target1-abs
6890The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
6891@samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
6892or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
6893and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
6894
6895@cindex TARGET2
6896@kindex --target2=@var{type}
6897The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
6898@samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
6899meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
6900@table @samp
6901@item rel
eeac373a
PB
6902@samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
6903@item abs
6904@samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
3674e28a
PB
6905@item got-rel
6906@samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
6907@end table
6908
319850b4
JB
6909@cindex FIX_V4BX
6910@kindex --fix-v4bx
6911The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
6912specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
6913interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
6914also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
6915
6916In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
6917linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
6918@code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
6919
6920In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6921relocations are ignored.
6922
845b51d6
PB
6923@cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
6924@kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
6925Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6926relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
6927
6928@smallexample
6929TST rM, #1
6930MOVEQ PC, rM
6931BX Rn
6932@end smallexample
6933
6934This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
6935and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
11e7fd74 6936condition flags, so may cause incorrect program behavior in rare cases.
845b51d6 6937
33bfe774
JB
6938@cindex USE_BLX
6939@kindex --use-blx
6940The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
6941BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
6942situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
6943code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
6944each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
6945
6946This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
6947specify it if you are using that target.
6948
c6dd86c6
JB
6949@cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
6950@kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
6951The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
6952bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
6953instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
6954to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
6955the support code can read the intended values.
6956
6957The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
6958intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
6959and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
6960intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
6961full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
6962you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
6963
6964If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
6965enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
6966@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
6967mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
6968vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
6969@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
6970
6971If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6972potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6973such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
6974first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
6975instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
6976the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
6977are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
6978
2de70689
MGD
6979@cindex ARM1176 erratum workaround
6980@kindex --fix-arm1176
6981@kindex --no-fix-arm1176
9d5777a3
RM
6982The @samp{--fix-arm1176} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum
6983in certain ARM1176 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you
6984are targeting ARM v6 (excluding ARM v6T2) or earlier. It can be disabled
2de70689
MGD
6985unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-arm1176}.
6986
9d5777a3 6987Further information is available in the ``ARM1176JZ-S and ARM1176JZF-S
11e7fd74 6988Programmer Advice Notice'' available on the ARM documentation website at:
2de70689
MGD
6989http://infocenter.arm.com/.
6990
a504d23a
LA
6991@cindex STM32L4xx erratum workaround
6992@kindex --fix-stm32l4xx-629360
6993
6994The @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360} switch enables a link-time
6995workaround for a bug in the bus matrix / memory controller for some of
6996the STM32 Cortex-M4 based products (STM32L4xx). When accessing
6997off-chip memory via the affected bus for bus reads of 9 words or more,
6998the bus can generate corrupt data and/or abort. These are only
6999core-initiated accesses (not DMA), and might affect any access:
7000integer loads such as LDM, POP and floating-point loads such as VLDM,
7001VPOP. Stores are not affected.
7002
7003The bug can be avoided by splitting memory accesses into the
7004necessary chunks to keep bus reads below 8 words.
7005
7006The workaround is not enabled by default, this is equivalent to use
7007@samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=none}. If you know you are using buggy
7008STM32L4xx hardware, you can enable the workaround by specifying the
7009linker option @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360}, or the equivalent
7010@samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=default}.
7011
7012If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
7013potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
7014such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists in a
7015replacement sequence emulating the behaviour of the original one and a
7016branch back to the subsequent instruction. The original instruction is
7017then replaced with a branch to the veneer.
7018
7019The workaround does not always preserve the memory access order for
7020the LDMDB instruction, when the instruction loads the PC.
7021
7022The workaround is not able to handle problematic instructions when
7023they are in the middle of an IT block, since a branch is not allowed
7024there. In that case, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
7025occurs.
7026
7027The workaround is not able to replace problematic instructions with a
7028PC-relative branch instruction if the @samp{.text} section is too
7029large. In that case, when the branch that replaces the original code
7030cannot be encoded, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
7031occurs.
7032
bf21ed78
MS
7033@cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
7034@kindex --no-enum-size-warning
726150b7 7035The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
bf21ed78
MS
7036warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
7037enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
7038linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
7039using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
7040not be diagnosed.
a9dc9481
JM
7041
7042@cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
7043@kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
7044The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
7045warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
7046@code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
7047linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
7048using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
bf21ed78 7049
726150b7
NC
7050@cindex PIC_VENEER
7051@kindex --pic-veneer
7052The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
7053ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
7054is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
7055@samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
7056
7057@cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
7058@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
7059The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
7060code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
7061perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
7062placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
a05a5b64 7063controlled by the command-line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
726150b7 7064The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
11e7fd74 7065duplicate stubs, increasing the code size. The linker will try to
726150b7
NC
7066group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
7067code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
7068where they should be placed.
7069
7070The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
7071@option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
07d72278 7072placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
726150b7
NC
7073branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
7074placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
7075value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
7076exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
7077A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
7078linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
7079from the input sections.
7080
7081The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
7082@samp{N = +1}.
7083
1a51c1a4
NC
7084Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
7085only, because it relies on object files properties not present
7086otherwise.
7087
1db37fe6
YG
7088@cindex Cortex-A8 erratum workaround
7089@kindex --fix-cortex-a8
7090@kindex --no-fix-cortex-a8
7091The @samp{--fix-cortex-a8} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile. It can be enabled otherwise by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a8}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a8}.
7092
7093The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code. Please contact ARM for further details.
7094
68fcca92
JW
7095@cindex Cortex-A53 erratum 835769 workaround
7096@kindex --fix-cortex-a53-835769
7097@kindex --no-fix-cortex-a53-835769
7098The @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769} switch enables a link-time workaround for erratum 835769 present on certain early revisions of Cortex-A53 processors. The workaround is disabled by default. It can be enabled by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a53-835769}.
7099
7100Please contact ARM for further details.
7101
1db37fe6
YG
7102@kindex --merge-exidx-entries
7103@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
7104@cindex Merging exidx entries
7105The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent exidx entries in debuginfo.
7106
7107@kindex --long-plt
7108@cindex 32-bit PLT entries
7109The @samp{--long-plt} option enables the use of 16 byte PLT entries
7110which support up to 4Gb of code. The default is to use 12 byte PLT
7111entries which only support 512Mb of code.
7112
1f56df9d
JW
7113@kindex --no-apply-dynamic-relocs
7114@cindex AArch64 rela addend
7115The @samp{--no-apply-dynamic-relocs} option makes AArch64 linker do not apply
7116link-time values for dynamic relocations.
7117
4ba2ef8f
TP
7118@cindex Placement of SG veneers
7119All SG veneers are placed in the special output section @code{.gnu.sgstubs}.
a05a5b64 7120Its start address must be set, either with the command-line option
4ba2ef8f
TP
7121@samp{--section-start} or in a linker script, to indicate where to place these
7122veneers in memory.
7123
54ddd295
TP
7124@kindex --cmse-implib
7125@cindex Secure gateway import library
7126The @samp{--cmse-implib} option requests that the import libraries
7127specified by the @samp{--out-implib} and @samp{--in-implib} options are
7128secure gateway import libraries, suitable for linking a non-secure
7129executable against secure code as per ARMv8-M Security Extensions.
7130
0955507f
TP
7131@kindex --in-implib=@var{file}
7132@cindex Input import library
7133The @samp{--in-implib=file} specifies an input import library whose symbols
7134must keep the same address in the executable being produced. A warning is
7135given if no @samp{--out-implib} is given but new symbols have been introduced
7136in the executable that should be listed in its import library. Otherwise, if
7137@samp{--out-implib} is specified, the symbols are added to the output import
7138library. A warning is also given if some symbols present in the input import
7139library have disappeared from the executable. This option is only effective
7140for Secure Gateway import libraries, ie. when @samp{--cmse-implib} is
7141specified.
7142
36f63dca
NC
7143@ifclear GENERIC
7144@lowersections
7145@end ifclear
7146@end ifset
7147
7148@ifset HPPA
7149@ifclear GENERIC
7150@raisesections
7151@end ifclear
7152
7153@node HPPA ELF32
7154@section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
7155@cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
7156@kindex --multi-subspace
7157When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
7158import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
7159The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
7160stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
7161multiple sub-spaces.
7162
7163@cindex HPPA stub grouping
7164@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
7165Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
7166stub sections located between groups of input sections.
7167@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
7168sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
7169a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
7170the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
7171conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7172prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7173A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7174branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
7175@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
7176@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7177detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7178positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7179
7180Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
7181single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7182create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
7183large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7184
7185@ifclear GENERIC
7186@lowersections
7187@end ifclear
7188@end ifset
7189
7fb9f789
NC
7190@ifset M68K
7191@ifclear GENERIC
7192@raisesections
7193@end ifclear
7194
7195@node M68K
7196@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
7197
7198@cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
7199@kindex --got=@var{type}
7200The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
7201The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
7202@samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
7203the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
7204@samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
7205entries only at non-negative offsets.
7206@samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
7207entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
7208support such GOTs.
7209@samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
7210output file. All GOT references from a single input object
7211file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
7212files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
7213
7214@ifclear GENERIC
7215@lowersections
7216@end ifclear
7217@end ifset
7218
833794fc
MR
7219@ifset MIPS
7220@ifclear GENERIC
7221@raisesections
7222@end ifclear
7223
7224@node MIPS
7225@section @command{ld} and the MIPS family
7226
7227@cindex MIPS microMIPS instruction choice selection
7228@kindex --insn32
7229@kindex --no-insn32
7230The @samp{--insn32} and @samp{--no-insn32} options control the choice of
7231microMIPS instructions used in code generated by the linker, such as that
7232in the PLT or lazy binding stubs, or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is
7233used, then the linker only uses 32-bit instruction encodings. By default
7234or if @samp{--no-insn32} is used, all instruction encodings are used,
7235including 16-bit ones where possible.
7236
8b10b0b3
MR
7237@cindex MIPS branch relocation check control
7238@kindex --ignore-branch-isa
7239@kindex --no-ignore-branch-isa
7240The @samp{--ignore-branch-isa} and @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} options
7241control branch relocation checks for invalid ISA mode transitions. If
7242@samp{--ignore-branch-isa} is used, then the linker accepts any branch
7243relocations and any ISA mode transition required is lost in relocation
7244calculation, except for some cases of @code{BAL} instructions which meet
7245relaxation conditions and are converted to equivalent @code{JALX}
7246instructions as the associated relocation is calculated. By default
7247or if @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} is used a check is made causing
7248the loss of an ISA mode transition to produce an error.
7249
833794fc
MR
7250@ifclear GENERIC
7251@lowersections
7252@end ifclear
7253@end ifset
7254
36f63dca
NC
7255@ifset MMIX
7256@ifclear GENERIC
7257@raisesections
7258@end ifclear
7259
7260@node MMIX
7261@section @code{ld} and MMIX
7262For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
7263@code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
7264understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
7265can translate between the two formats.
7266
7267There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
7268Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
7269registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
7270equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
7271@samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
7272global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
7273this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
7274symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
7275
7a2de473
HPN
7276Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
7277@code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
7278The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
7279of a section.
36f63dca
NC
7280
7281Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
7282are left out from an mmo file.
7283
7284@ifclear GENERIC
7285@lowersections
7286@end ifclear
7287@end ifset
7288
7289@ifset MSP430
7290@ifclear GENERIC
7291@raisesections
7292@end ifclear
7293
7294@node MSP430
7295@section @code{ld} and MSP430
7296For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
7297will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
7298just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
7299
7300@cindex MSP430 extra sections
7301The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
7302
7303@table @code
7304@item @samp{.vectors}
7305Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
7306
7307@item @samp{.bootloader}
7308Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
7309in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
7310
7311@item @samp{.infomem}
7312Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
7313this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
7314
c0065db7 7315@item @samp{.infomemnobits}
36f63dca
NC
7316This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
7317in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
7318
7319@item @samp{.noinit}
7320Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
7321
c0065db7 7322The last two sections are used by gcc.
36f63dca
NC
7323@end table
7324
7ef3addb
JL
7325@table @option
7326@cindex MSP430 Options
7327@kindex --code-region
7328@item --code-region=[either,lower,upper,none]
7329This will transform .text* sections to [either,lower,upper].text* sections. The
7330argument passed to GCC for -mcode-region is propagated to the linker
7331using this option.
7332
7333@kindex --data-region
7334@item --data-region=[either,lower,upper,none]
7335This will transform .data*, .bss* and .rodata* sections to
7336[either,lower,upper].[data,bss,rodata]* sections. The argument passed to GCC
7337for -mdata-region is propagated to the linker using this option.
7338
7339@kindex --disable-sec-transformation
7340@item --disable-sec-transformation
7341Prevent the transformation of sections as specified by the @code{--code-region}
7342and @code{--data-region} options.
7343This is useful if you are compiling and linking using a single call to the GCC
7344wrapper, and want to compile the source files using -m[code,data]-region but
7345not transform the sections for prebuilt libraries and objects.
7346@end table
7347
36f63dca
NC
7348@ifclear GENERIC
7349@lowersections
7350@end ifclear
7351@end ifset
7352
35c08157
KLC
7353@ifset NDS32
7354@ifclear GENERIC
7355@raisesections
7356@end ifclear
7357
7358@node NDS32
7359@section @code{ld} and NDS32
7360@kindex relaxing on NDS32
7361For NDS32, there are some options to select relaxation behavior. The linker
7362relaxes objects according to these options.
7363
7364@table @code
7365@item @samp{--m[no-]fp-as-gp}
7366Disable/enable fp-as-gp relaxation.
7367
7368@item @samp{--mexport-symbols=FILE}
7369Exporting symbols and their address into FILE as linker script.
7370
7371@item @samp{--m[no-]ex9}
7372Disable/enable link-time EX9 relaxation.
7373
7374@item @samp{--mexport-ex9=FILE}
7375Export the EX9 table after linking.
7376
7377@item @samp{--mimport-ex9=FILE}
7378Import the Ex9 table for EX9 relaxation.
7379
7380@item @samp{--mupdate-ex9}
7381Update the existing EX9 table.
7382
7383@item @samp{--mex9-limit=NUM}
7384Maximum number of entries in the ex9 table.
7385
7386@item @samp{--mex9-loop-aware}
7387Avoid generating the EX9 instruction inside the loop.
7388
7389@item @samp{--m[no-]ifc}
7390Disable/enable the link-time IFC optimization.
7391
7392@item @samp{--mifc-loop-aware}
7393Avoid generating the IFC instruction inside the loop.
7394@end table
7395
7396@ifclear GENERIC
7397@lowersections
7398@end ifclear
7399@end ifset
7400
78058a5e
SL
7401@ifset NIOSII
7402@ifclear GENERIC
7403@raisesections
7404@end ifclear
7405
7406@node Nios II
7407@section @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
7408@cindex Nios II call relaxation
7409@kindex --relax on Nios II
7410
7411Call and immediate jump instructions on Nios II processors are limited to
7412transferring control to addresses in the same 256MB memory segment,
7413which may result in @command{ld} giving
7414@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7415The command-line option @option{--relax} enables the generation of
7416trampolines that can access the entire 32-bit address space for calls
7417outside the normal @code{call} and @code{jmpi} address range. These
7418trampolines are inserted at section boundaries, so may not themselves
7419be reachable if an input section and its associated call trampolines are
7420larger than 256MB.
7421
7422The @option{--relax} option is enabled by default unless @option{-r}
7423is also specified. You can disable trampoline generation by using the
7424@option{--no-relax} linker option. You can also disable this optimization
7425locally by using the @samp{set .noat} directive in assembly-language
7426source files, as the linker-inserted trampolines use the @code{at}
7427register as a temporary.
7428
7429Note that the linker @option{--relax} option is independent of assembler
7430relaxation options, and that using the GNU assembler's @option{-relax-all}
7431option interferes with the linker's more selective call instruction relaxation.
7432
7433@ifclear GENERIC
7434@lowersections
7435@end ifclear
7436@end ifset
7437
2a60a7a8
AM
7438@ifset POWERPC
7439@ifclear GENERIC
7440@raisesections
7441@end ifclear
7442
7443@node PowerPC ELF32
7444@section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
7445@cindex PowerPC long branches
7446@kindex --relax on PowerPC
7447Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
7448displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
7449@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7450@samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
7451the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
7452section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
c8a1f254
NS
7453section exceeds 33M in size. You may combine @samp{-r} and
7454@samp{--relax} to add trampolines in a partial link. In that case
7455both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
7456considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
2a60a7a8
AM
7457
7458@cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
7459@table @option
7460@cindex PowerPC PLT
7461@kindex --bss-plt
7462@item --bss-plt
7463Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
7464generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
7465the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
7466writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
7467@command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
7468PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
7469compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
7470BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
7471
016687f8
AM
7472@kindex --secure-plt
7473@item --secure-plt
7474@command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
7475@samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
7476when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
7477layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
7478style BSS PLT.
7479
2a60a7a8
AM
7480@cindex PowerPC GOT
7481@kindex --sdata-got
7482@item --sdata-got
7483The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
7484sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
7485@code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
7486section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
7487@code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
7488@code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
7489@samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
7490@code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
7491PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
7492pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
7493GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
7494really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
7495
7496@cindex PowerPC stub symbols
7497@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7498@item --emit-stub-syms
7499This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7500symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7501
7502@cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
7503@kindex --no-tls-optimize
7504@item --no-tls-optimize
7505PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7506sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7507disable the optimization.
7508@end table
7509
7510@ifclear GENERIC
7511@lowersections
7512@end ifclear
7513@end ifset
7514
7515@ifset POWERPC64
7516@ifclear GENERIC
7517@raisesections
7518@end ifclear
7519
7520@node PowerPC64 ELF64
7521@section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
7522
7523@cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
7524@table @option
7525@cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
7526@kindex --stub-group-size
7527@item --stub-group-size
7528Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
7529by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
7530@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
7531sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
7532a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
7533the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
7534conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7535prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7536A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7537branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
7538@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
7539@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7540detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7541positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7542
7543Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
7544single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7545create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
7546large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7547
7548@cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
7549@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7550@item --emit-stub-syms
7551This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7552symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7553
7554@cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
7555@kindex --dotsyms
7556@kindex --no-dotsyms
95421fb9
AM
7557@item --dotsyms
7558@itemx --no-dotsyms
2a60a7a8
AM
7559These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
7560in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
7561function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
7562code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
7563properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
7564to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
7565@samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
7566dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
7567feature.
7568
7ae4ea7d
AM
7569@cindex PowerPC64 register save/restore functions
7570@kindex --save-restore-funcs
7571@kindex --no-save-restore-funcs
95421fb9
AM
7572@item --save-restore-funcs
7573@itemx --no-save-restore-funcs
7ae4ea7d
AM
7574These two options control whether PowerPC64 @command{ld} automatically
7575provides out-of-line register save and restore functions used by
7576@samp{-Os} code. The default is to provide any such referenced
7577function for a normal final link, and to not do so for a relocatable
7578link.
7579
2a60a7a8
AM
7580@cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
7581@kindex --no-tls-optimize
7582@item --no-tls-optimize
7583PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7584sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7585disable the optimization.
7586
7c9cf415
AM
7587@cindex PowerPC64 __tls_get_addr optimization
7588@kindex --tls-get-addr-optimize
7589@kindex --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
95421fb9
AM
7590@item --tls-get-addr-optimize
7591@itemx --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
7c9cf415
AM
7592These options control whether PowerPC64 @command{ld} uses a special
7593stub to call __tls_get_addr. PowerPC64 glibc 2.22 and later support
7594an optimization that allows the second and subsequent calls to
7595@code{__tls_get_addr} for a given symbol to be resolved by the special
7596stub without calling in to glibc. By default the linker enables this
7597option when glibc advertises the availability of __tls_get_addr_opt.
7598Forcing this option on when using an older glibc won't do much besides
7599slow down your applications, but may be useful if linking an
7600application against an older glibc with the expectation that it will
7601normally be used on systems having a newer glibc.
7602
2a60a7a8
AM
7603@cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
7604@kindex --no-opd-optimize
7605@item --no-opd-optimize
7606PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
7607corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
e7fc76dd 7608the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
2a60a7a8
AM
7609Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
7610
7611@cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
7612@kindex --non-overlapping-opd
7613@item --non-overlapping-opd
7614Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
7615@code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
7616the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
7617entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
7618
7619@cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
7620@kindex --no-toc-optimize
7621@item --no-toc-optimize
7622PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
7623entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
7624reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
7625marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
7626marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
7627relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
7628unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
7629reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
7630discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
7631reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
7632code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
7633optimization.
7634
7635@cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
7636@kindex --no-multi-toc
7637@item --no-multi-toc
794e51c0
AM
7638If given any toc option besides @code{-mcmodel=medium} or
7639@code{-mcmodel=large}, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model
7640where TOC
2a60a7a8
AM
7641entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
7642total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
7643grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
7644TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
7645calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
7646help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
764764K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
7648Use this option to turn off this feature.
794e51c0
AM
7649
7650@cindex PowerPC64 TOC sorting
7651@kindex --no-toc-sort
7652@item --no-toc-sort
7653By default, @command{ld} sorts TOC sections so that those whose file
7654happens to have a section called @code{.init} or @code{.fini} are
7655placed first, followed by TOC sections referenced by code generated
7656with PowerPC64 gcc's @code{-mcmodel=small}, and lastly TOC sections
7657referenced only by code generated with PowerPC64 gcc's
7658@code{-mcmodel=medium} or @code{-mcmodel=large} options. Doing this
7659results in better TOC grouping for multi-TOC. Use this option to turn
7660off this feature.
7661
7662@cindex PowerPC64 PLT stub alignment
7663@kindex --plt-align
7664@kindex --no-plt-align
7665@item --plt-align
7666@itemx --no-plt-align
7667Use these options to control whether individual PLT call stubs are
2420fff6
AM
7668aligned to a 32-byte boundary, or to the specified power of two
7669boundary when using @code{--plt-align=}. A negative value may be
7670specified to pad PLT call stubs so that they do not cross the
7671specified power of two boundary (or the minimum number of boundaries
7672if a PLT stub is so large that it must cross a boundary). By default
7673PLT call stubs are aligned to 32-byte boundaries.
794e51c0
AM
7674
7675@cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub static chain
7676@kindex --plt-static-chain
7677@kindex --no-plt-static-chain
7678@item --plt-static-chain
7679@itemx --no-plt-static-chain
7680Use these options to control whether PLT call stubs load the static
7681chain pointer (r11). @code{ld} defaults to not loading the static
7682chain since there is never any need to do so on a PLT call.
7683
7684@cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub thread safety
7685@kindex --plt-thread-safe
7686@kindex --no-plt-thread-safe
7687@item --plt-thread-safe
1be5d8d3 7688@itemx --no-plt-thread-safe
794e51c0
AM
7689With power7's weakly ordered memory model, it is possible when using
7690lazy binding for ld.so to update a plt entry in one thread and have
7691another thread see the individual plt entry words update in the wrong
7692order, despite ld.so carefully writing in the correct order and using
7693memory write barriers. To avoid this we need some sort of read
7694barrier in the call stub, or use LD_BIND_NOW=1. By default, @code{ld}
7695looks for calls to commonly used functions that create threads, and if
7696seen, adds the necessary barriers. Use these options to change the
7697default behaviour.
8b5f1ed8
AM
7698
7699@cindex PowerPC64 ELFv2 PLT localentry optimization
7700@kindex --plt-localentry
7701@kindex --no-plt-localentry
7702@item --plt-localentry
7703@itemx --no-localentry
7704ELFv2 functions with localentry:0 are those with a single entry point,
7705ie. global entry == local entry, and that have no requirement on r2
7706(the TOC/GOT pointer) or r12, and guarantee r2 is unchanged on return.
7707Such an external function can be called via the PLT without saving r2
7708or restoring it on return, avoiding a common load-hit-store for small
7709functions. The optimization is attractive, with up to 40% reduction
7710in execution time for a small function, but can result in symbol
d44c746a
AM
7711interposition failures. Also, minor changes in a shared library,
7712including system libraries, can cause a function that was localentry:0
7713to become localentry:8. This will result in a dynamic loader
7714complaint and failure to run. The option is experimental, use with
7715care. @option{--no-plt-localentry} is the default.
2a60a7a8
AM
7716@end table
7717
7718@ifclear GENERIC
7719@lowersections
7720@end ifclear
7721@end ifset
7722
b4cbbe8f
AK
7723@ifset S/390
7724@ifclear GENERIC
7725@raisesections
7726@end ifclear
7727
7728@node S/390 ELF
7729@section @command{ld} and S/390 ELF Support
7730
7731@cindex S/390 ELF options
7732@table @option
7733
7734@cindex S/390
7735@kindex --s390-pgste
7736@item --s390-pgste
7737This option marks the result file with a @code{PT_S390_PGSTE}
7738segment. The Linux kernel is supposed to allocate 4k page tables for
7739binaries marked that way.
7740@end table
7741
7742@ifclear GENERIC
7743@lowersections
7744@end ifclear
7745@end ifset
7746
49fa1e15
AM
7747@ifset SPU
7748@ifclear GENERIC
7749@raisesections
7750@end ifclear
7751
7752@node SPU ELF
7753@section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
7754
7755@cindex SPU ELF options
7756@table @option
7757
7758@cindex SPU plugins
7759@kindex --plugin
7760@item --plugin
7761This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
7762
7763@cindex SPU overlays
7764@kindex --no-overlays
7765@item --no-overlays
7766Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
7767regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
7768@command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
7769turns off all this special overlay handling.
7770
7771@cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
7772@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7773@item --emit-stub-syms
7774This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
7775symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7776
7777@cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
7778@kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
7779@item --extra-overlay-stubs
7780This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
7781function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
7782on calls to non-overlay regions.
7783
7784@cindex SPU local store size
7785@kindex --local-store=lo:hi
7786@item --local-store=lo:hi
7787@command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
7788the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
7789range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
7790
c0065db7 7791@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
7792@kindex --stack-analysis
7793@item --stack-analysis
7794SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
7795unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
7796under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
7797@command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
7798@command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
7799determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
7800for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
7801for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
7802for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
7803find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
7804and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
7805under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
7806dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
7807is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
7808and calls will be given.
7809
c0065db7 7810@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
7811@kindex --emit-stack-syms
7812@item --emit-stack-syms
7813This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
7814in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
7815These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
7816functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
7817functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
7818such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
7819The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
c0065db7 7820@code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
49fa1e15
AM
7821@end table
7822
7823@ifclear GENERIC
7824@lowersections
7825@end ifclear
7826@end ifset
7827
36f63dca
NC
7828@ifset TICOFF
7829@ifclear GENERIC
7830@raisesections
7831@end ifclear
7832
7833@node TI COFF
7834@section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
7835@cindex TI COFF versions
7836@kindex --format=@var{version}
7837The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
7838TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
7839also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
7840format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
7841header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
7842
7843@ifclear GENERIC
7844@lowersections
7845@end ifclear
7846@end ifset
7847
2ca22b03
NC
7848@ifset WIN32
7849@ifclear GENERIC
7850@raisesections
7851@end ifclear
7852
7853@node WIN32
7854@section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
7855
c0065db7 7856This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
a05a5b64
TP
7857See @ref{Options,,Command-line Options} for detailed description of the
7858command-line options mentioned here.
2ca22b03
NC
7859
7860@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
7861@cindex import libraries
7862@item import libraries
69da35b5 7863The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
2ca22b03 7864libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
69da35b5
NC
7865regular static archives and are handled as any other static
7866archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
2ca22b03 7867support for creating such libraries provided with the
a05a5b64 7868@samp{--out-implib} command-line option.
2ca22b03 7869
c0065db7
RM
7870@item exporting DLL symbols
7871@cindex exporting DLL symbols
dc8465bf
NC
7872The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
7873
7874@table @emph
7875@item using auto-export functionality
7876@cindex using auto-export functionality
7877By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
a05a5b64 7878which is controlled by the following command-line options:
dc8465bf 7879
0a5d968e
NC
7880@itemize
7881@item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
7882@item --exclude-symbols
7883@item --exclude-libs
e1c37eb5 7884@item --exclude-modules-for-implib
09e2aba4 7885@item --version-script
0a5d968e
NC
7886@end itemize
7887
09e2aba4
DK
7888When auto-export is in operation, @command{ld} will export all the non-local
7889(global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with the exception of a few
7890symbols known to belong to the system's runtime and libraries. As it will
7891often not be desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include
7892private functions that are not part of any public interface, the command-line
9d5777a3 7893options listed above may be used to filter symbols out from the list for
09e2aba4
DK
7894exporting. The @samp{--output-def} option can be used in order to see the
7895final list of exported symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
7896
7897If @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
0a5d968e
NC
7898command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
7899if either of the following are true:
7900
7901@itemize
7902@item A DEF file is used.
7903@item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
7904@end itemize
dc8465bf 7905
c0065db7
RM
7906@item using a DEF file
7907@cindex using a DEF file
dc8465bf
NC
7908Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
7909an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
7910exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
7911name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
0a5d968e 7912command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
dc8465bf
NC
7913
7914@example
7915gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
7916@end example
7917
0a5d968e
NC
7918Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
7919@samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7920
dc8465bf
NC
7921Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
7922
7923@example
4b5bd4e7 7924LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
dc8465bf
NC
7925
7926EXPORTS
7927foo
7928bar
7929_bar = bar
4b5bd4e7
DS
7930another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
7931var1 DATA
7fcab871
KT
7932doo = foo == foo2
7933eoo DATA == var1
c0065db7 7934@end example
dc8465bf 7935
7fcab871 7936This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and seven
4b5bd4e7
DS
7937symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
7938alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
7939by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
7940@code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
7fcab871
KT
7941@code{var1} is declared to be a data object. The @samp{doo} symbol in
7942export library is an alias of @samp{foo}, which gets the string name
7943in export table @samp{foo2}. The @samp{eoo} symbol is an data export
7944symbol, which gets in export table the name @samp{var1}.
4b5bd4e7 7945
6b31ad16
DS
7946The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
7947name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
7948the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
7949
b45619c0
NC
7950When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
7951library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
6b31ad16 7952@code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
c0065db7 7953executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
6b31ad16
DS
7954
7955With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
7956specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
c0065db7 7957non-default base address for the image.
6b31ad16
DS
7958
7959If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
a2877985
DS
7960or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
7961filename specified on the command line.
6b31ad16 7962
4b5bd4e7
DS
7963The complete specification of an export symbol is:
7964
7965@example
7966EXPORTS
7967 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
7968 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
7fcab871 7969 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] [== <name3>] ) *
c0065db7 7970@end example
4b5bd4e7
DS
7971
7972Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
7973@samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
7974@samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
7975@samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
7976Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
7fcab871
KT
7977@samp{<integer>} alias. The optional @samp{<name3>} is the to be used
7978string in import/export table for the symbol.
4b5bd4e7
DS
7979
7980The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
7981
7982@code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
7983will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
7984by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
7985linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
7986library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
7987
7988@code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
7989The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
7990the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
7991@code{*_imp__foo}).
7992
7993@code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
7994well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
7995read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
7996variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
7997the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
7998extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
7999application will behave unexpectedly.
8000
8001@code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
8002it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
8003symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
de194d85 8004API at runtime or by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
4b5bd4e7 8005the DLL without an import library.
c0065db7 8006
4b5bd4e7
DS
8007See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
8008other DEF file statements
dc8465bf
NC
8009
8010@cindex creating a DEF file
8011While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
a05a5b64 8012with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command-line option.
0a5d968e
NC
8013
8014@item Using decorations
8015@cindex Using decorations
8016Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
8017itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
8018declared as:
8019
8020@example
8021__declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
8022__declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
8023@end example
8024
8025All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
8026any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
8027this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
8028the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
8029
8030Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
c0065db7 8031decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
0a5d968e
NC
8032instead:
8033
8034@example
8035__declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
8036__declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
8037@end example
8038
c0065db7
RM
8039This complicates the structure of library header files, because
8040when included by the library itself the header must declare the
0a5d968e
NC
8041variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
8042code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
c0065db7 8043of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
0a5d968e
NC
8044omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
8045@samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
b45619c0 8046information.
c0065db7 8047@end table
dc8465bf 8048
2ca22b03
NC
8049@cindex automatic data imports
8050@item automatic data imports
8051The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
69da35b5 8052by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
2ca22b03 8053compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
c0065db7 8054issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
69da35b5 8055code to these platforms, especially for large
2ca22b03 8056c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
c0065db7 8057initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
b45619c0 8058decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
c0065db7 8059platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
69da35b5
NC
8060command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
8061The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
8062suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
8063trigger the feature's use.
8064
c0065db7 8065auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
69da35b5
NC
8066additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
8067
c0065db7 8068"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
69da35b5
NC
8069documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
8070
c0065db7
RM
8071The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
8072occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
8073One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
69da35b5
NC
8074below.
8075
8076@cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
c0065db7
RM
8077For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
8078object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
8079offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
8080field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
8081in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
69da35b5 8082without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
c0065db7 8083The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
69da35b5
NC
8084references.
8085
c0065db7
RM
8086The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
8087be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
8088themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
8089runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
8090compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
8091support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
69da35b5
NC
8092run without error on an older system.
8093
c0065db7
RM
8094@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
8095enabled as needed.
2ca22b03
NC
8096
8097@cindex direct linking to a dll
8098@item direct linking to a dll
8099The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
8100including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
69da35b5 8101libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
b45619c0 8102traditional import library method, especially when linking large
c0065db7
RM
8103libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
8104function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
8105though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
69da35b5 8106storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
c0065db7 8107tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
69da35b5
NC
8108large or complex libraries when using import libs.
8109
c0065db7 8110Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
69da35b5 8111@samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
c0065db7 8112of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
69da35b5
NC
8113perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
8114select the dll instead of an import library.
8115
2ca22b03 8116
69da35b5
NC
8117For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
8118to find, in the first directory of its search path,
2ca22b03
NC
8119
8120@example
45e948fe
NC
8121libxxx.dll.a
8122xxx.dll.a
8123libxxx.a
8124xxx.lib
f6c4d4b1 8125libxxx.lib
69da35b5 8126cygxxx.dll (*)
45e948fe
NC
8127libxxx.dll
8128xxx.dll
2ca22b03
NC
8129@end example
8130
69da35b5
NC
8131before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
8132
c0065db7
RM
8133(*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
8134where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
8135@samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
8136file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
69da35b5
NC
8137@samp{cygxxx.dll}.
8138
c0065db7
RM
8139Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
8140@samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
69da35b5
NC
8141was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
8142various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
8143could coexist on the same machine.
8144
2ca22b03
NC
8145The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
8146applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
69da35b5 8147libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
2ca22b03
NC
8148
8149@example
8150bin/
8151 cygxxx.dll
8152lib/
8153 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
c0065db7 8154 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
2ca22b03
NC
8155@end example
8156
c0065db7
RM
8157Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
8158done two ways:
2ca22b03
NC
8159
81601. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
8161@example
8162gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
c0065db7 8163@end example
2ca22b03 8164
69da35b5
NC
8165However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
8166(@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
8167@samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
8168not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
8169
2ca22b03
NC
81702. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
8171directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
8172should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
8173making the app/dll.
8174
8175@example
8176ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
c0065db7 8177@end example
2ca22b03
NC
8178
8179Then you can link without any make environment changes.
8180
8181@example
8182gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
c0065db7 8183@end example
69da35b5
NC
8184
8185This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
8186perfectly legal
8187
8188@example
8189bin/
8190 cygxxx-5.dll
8191lib/
c0065db7 8192 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
69da35b5
NC
8193@end example
8194
dc8465bf 8195Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
69da35b5
NC
8196even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
8197@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
8198
8199Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
45e948fe 8200wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
69da35b5
NC
8201
82021. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
8203work with auto-imported data.
8204
dc8465bf
NC
82052. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
8206import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
8207symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
8208for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
8209possible to do this without an import lib.
69da35b5 8210
45e948fe
NC
82113. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
8212critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
8213in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
8214stdcall-decorated assembly names.
8215
69da35b5 8216So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
c0065db7
RM
8217true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
8218a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
8219binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
69da35b5
NC
8220massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
8221requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
8222will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
dc8465bf 8223
c0065db7 8224@item symbol aliasing
dc8465bf 8225@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
8226@item adding additional names
8227Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
dc8465bf
NC
8228A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
8229exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
8230when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
c0065db7 8231import library. Consider the following DEF file:
dc8465bf 8232
c0065db7 8233@example
dc8465bf
NC
8234LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
8235
8236EXPORTS
c0065db7 8237foo
dc8465bf 8238_foo = foo
c0065db7 8239@end example
dc8465bf
NC
8240
8241The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
8242
8243Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
8244source code using the "weak" attribute:
8245
c0065db7
RM
8246@example
8247void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
dc8465bf 8248void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
c0065db7 8249@end example
dc8465bf
NC
8250
8251See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
8252symbols.
8253
8254@item renaming symbols
8255Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
c0065db7 8256kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
dc8465bf
NC
8257@samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
8258DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
c0065db7 8259created). In the following example:
dc8465bf 8260
c0065db7 8261@example
dc8465bf
NC
8262LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
8263
8264EXPORTS
8265_foo = foo
c0065db7 8266@end example
dc8465bf
NC
8267
8268The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
8269@samp{_foo}.
c0065db7 8270@end table
dc8465bf 8271
0a5d968e 8272Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
a05a5b64 8273unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command-line option is used.
0a5d968e 8274If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
c0065db7
RM
8275@emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
8276that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
8277@samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
8278renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
8279to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
8280the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
8281In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
0a5d968e 8282which is probably not what you wanted.
c87db184
CF
8283
8284@cindex weak externals
8285@item weak externals
8286The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
8287weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
8288defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
8289are three variants of weak externals:
8290@itemize
8291@item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
8292called lazy externals.
8293@item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
8294This form is not presently implemented.
8295@item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
8296implemented.
8297@end itemize
8298As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
8299are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
8300uses a default value.
c1711530
DK
8301
8302@cindex aligned common symbols
8303@item aligned common symbols
8304As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to specify the
8305desired alignment for a common symbol. This information is conveyed from
8306the assembler or compiler to the linker by means of GNU-specific commands
8307carried in the object file's @samp{.drectve} section, which are recognized
8308by @command{ld} and respected when laying out the common symbols. Native
8309tools will be able to process object files employing this GNU extension,
8310but will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue noisy
8311warnings about unknown linker directives.
5063daf7 8312
2ca22b03
NC
8313@end table
8314
8315@ifclear GENERIC
8316@lowersections
8317@end ifclear
8318@end ifset
8319
e0001a05
NC
8320@ifset XTENSA
8321@ifclear GENERIC
8322@raisesections
8323@end ifclear
8324
8325@node Xtensa
8326@section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
8327
8328@cindex Xtensa processors
8329The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
8330@code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
8331specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
8332keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
8333example, with the command:
8334
8335@smallexample
8336SECTIONS
8337@{
8338 .text : @{
8339 *(.literal .text)
8340 @}
8341@}
8342@end smallexample
8343
8344@noindent
8345@command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
8346and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
8347literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
8348interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
8349group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
8350files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
8351and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
e0001a05 8352
43cd72b9 8353@cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
e0001a05 8354@cindex relaxing on Xtensa
43cd72b9
BW
8355Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
8356provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
8357is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
8358literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
8359will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
8360location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
8361the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
8362unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
8363@code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
8364range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
8365
8366For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
8367to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
8368instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
8369instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
8370instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
8371@code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
8372hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
8373By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
8374switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
8375density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
8376instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
8377performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
8378linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
8379a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
8380
8381The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
8382control the linker:
8383
8384@cindex Xtensa options
8385@table @option
43cd72b9
BW
8386@item --size-opt
8387When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
8388more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
8389no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
8390alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
8391preserve the correctness of the code.
8392@end table
e0001a05
NC
8393
8394@ifclear GENERIC
8395@lowersections
8396@end ifclear
8397@end ifset
8398
252b5132
RH
8399@ifclear SingleFormat
8400@node BFD
8401@chapter BFD
8402
8403@cindex back end
8404@cindex object file management
8405@cindex object formats available
8406@kindex objdump -i
8407The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
8408These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
8409object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
8410format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
8411it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
8412associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
8413object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
8414(@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
8415list all the formats available for your configuration.
8416
8417@cindex BFD requirements
8418@cindex requirements for BFD
8419As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
8420several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
8421BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
8422formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
8423been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
8424BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
8425may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
8426
8427One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
8428mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
8429useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
8430conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
8431
8432@menu
8433* BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
8434@end menu
8435
8436@node BFD outline
36f63dca 8437@section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
252b5132
RH
8438@cindex opening object files
8439@include bfdsumm.texi
8440@end ifclear
8441
8442@node Reporting Bugs
8443@chapter Reporting Bugs
ff5dcc92
SC
8444@cindex bugs in @command{ld}
8445@cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
252b5132 8446
ff5dcc92 8447Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
252b5132
RH
8448
8449Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
8450it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
ff5dcc92 8451to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
252b5132 8452work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
ff5dcc92 8453@command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
8454
8455In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
8456information that enables us to fix the bug.
8457
8458@menu
8459* Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
8460* Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
8461@end menu
8462
8463@node Bug Criteria
36f63dca 8464@section Have You Found a Bug?
252b5132
RH
8465@cindex bug criteria
8466
8467If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
8468
8469@itemize @bullet
8470@cindex fatal signal
8471@cindex linker crash
8472@cindex crash of linker
8473@item
8474If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
ff5dcc92 8475@command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
252b5132
RH
8476
8477@cindex error on valid input
8478@item
ff5dcc92 8479If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
252b5132
RH
8480
8481@cindex invalid input
8482@item
ff5dcc92 8483If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
252b5132
RH
8484may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
8485object files are correct.
8486
8487@item
8488If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
ff5dcc92 8489improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
252b5132
RH
8490@end itemize
8491
8492@node Bug Reporting
36f63dca 8493@section How to Report Bugs
252b5132 8494@cindex bug reports
ff5dcc92 8495@cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
252b5132
RH
8496
8497A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
ff5dcc92 8498products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
252b5132
RH
8499recommend you contact that organization first.
8500
8501You can find contact information for many support companies and
8502individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
8503distribution.
8504
ad22bfe8 8505@ifset BUGURL
ff5dcc92 8506Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
ad22bfe8
JM
8507@value{BUGURL}.
8508@end ifset
252b5132
RH
8509
8510The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
8511@strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
8512fact or leave it out, state it!
8513
8514Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
8515problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
b553b183
NC
8516assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
8517matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
8518the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
8519location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
8520were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
8521into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
8522specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
c0065db7 8523and the most helpful.
b553b183
NC
8524
8525Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
8526the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
8527on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
252b5132
RH
8528
8529Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
36f63dca
NC
8530bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
8531respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
8532You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
252b5132
RH
8533
8534To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
8535
8536@itemize @bullet
8537@item
ff5dcc92 8538The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
252b5132
RH
8539the @samp{--version} argument.
8540
8541Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
ff5dcc92 8542the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
8543
8544@item
ff5dcc92 8545Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
252b5132
RH
8546patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
8547
8548@item
8549The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
8550version number.
8551
8552@item
ff5dcc92 8553What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
252b5132
RH
8554``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
8555
8556@item
8557The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
8558observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
8559list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
8560sufficient.
8561
8562If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
8563and then we might not encounter the bug.
8564
8565@item
8566A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
b553b183
NC
8567bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
8568provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
8569bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
8570state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
8571requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
8572we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
8573attachments are best.
252b5132
RH
8574
8575If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
8576@code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
8577object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
8578@code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
8579how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
8580
8581@item
8582A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
8583incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
8584
ff5dcc92 8585Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
252b5132
RH
8586will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
8587not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
8588a chance to make a mistake.
8589
8590Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
8591say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
b45619c0 8592copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
252b5132
RH
8593C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
8594and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
8595fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
8596you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
8597any conclusion from our observations.
8598
8599@item
ff5dcc92 8600If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
252b5132
RH
8601diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
8602@samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
ff5dcc92 8603If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
252b5132
RH
8604context, not by line number.
8605
8606The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
8607sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
8608@end itemize
8609
8610Here are some things that are not necessary:
8611
8612@itemize @bullet
8613@item
8614A description of the envelope of the bug.
8615
8616Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
8617which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
8618changes will not affect it.
8619
8620This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
8621will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
8622with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
8623We recommend that you save your time for something else.
8624
8625Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
8626of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
8627output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
8628less time, and so on.
8629
8630However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
8631report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
8632
8633@item
8634A patch for the bug.
8635
8636A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
8637the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
8638a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
8639to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
8640
ff5dcc92 8641Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
252b5132
RH
8642construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
8643through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
8644able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
8645fixed.
8646
8647And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
8648patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
8649help us to understand.
8650
8651@item
8652A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
8653
8654Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
8655things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
8656@end itemize
8657
8658@node MRI
8659@appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
8660@cindex MRI compatibility
ff5dcc92
SC
8661To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
8662linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
252b5132
RH
8663alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
8664described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
8665simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
ff5dcc92 8666@command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
252b5132
RH
8667linker commands; these commands are described here.
8668
8669In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
8670file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
8671features to make use of them.
8672
8673You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
8674@samp{-c} command-line option.
8675
8676Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
8677command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
8678blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
ff5dcc92 8679MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
8680issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
8681
8682Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
8683
8684You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
8685lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
8686The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
8687
8688@table @code
8689@cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
8690@item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
8691@itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 8692Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
252b5132
RH
8693the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
8694@code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
8695your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
8696script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
8697commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
8698input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
8699@code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
8700
8701@cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
8702@item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
8703Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
8704in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
8705
8706@var{in-secname} may be an integer.
8707
8708@cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
8709@item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
8710Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
8711@var{expression} should be a power of two.
8712
8713@cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
8714@item BASE @var{expression}
8715Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
8716absolute addresses) in the output file.
8717
8718@cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
8719@item CHIP @var{expression}
8720@itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
8721This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
8722
8723@cindex @code{END} (MRI)
8724@item END
8725This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
8726
8727@cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
8728@item FORMAT @var{output-format}
8729Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
dc12032b 8730language, but restricted to S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
252b5132
RH
8731
8732@cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
8733@item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
8734Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
ff5dcc92 8735@command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
252b5132
RH
8736
8737The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
8738same line, with no change in its effect.
8739
8740@cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
8741@item LOAD @var{filename}
8742@itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
8743Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
ff5dcc92 8744same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
8745command line.
8746
8747@cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
8748@item NAME @var{output-name}
ff5dcc92 8749@var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
252b5132
RH
8750MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
8751option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
8752
8753@cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
8754@item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
8755@itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 8756Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
252b5132
RH
8757order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
8758script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
8759sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
8760file, in the order specified.
8761
8762@cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
8763@item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
8764@itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
8765@itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
8766Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
8767@var{name} used in the linker input files.
8768
8769@cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
8770@item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
8771@itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
8772@itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
8773You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
8774specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
8775If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
8776@var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
8777@end table
8778
793c5807
NC
8779@node GNU Free Documentation License
8780@appendix GNU Free Documentation License
36f63dca 8781@include fdl.texi
704c465c 8782
370b66a1
CD
8783@node LD Index
8784@unnumbered LD Index
252b5132
RH
8785
8786@printindex cp
8787
8788@tex
7ca01ed9 8789% I think something like @@colophon should be in texinfo. In the
252b5132
RH
8790% meantime:
8791\long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
8792\centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
8793\centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
8794\centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
8795\centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
8796\centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
8797\centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
8798\centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
8799\page\colophon
7ca01ed9 8800% Blame: doc@@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
252b5132
RH
8801@end tex
8802
252b5132 8803@bye
This page took 1.579303 seconds and 4 git commands to generate.